Peerless Industries KX-TDA200 IP Phone User Manual | Manualzz

Hybrid IP-PBX

Feature Guide

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30

Model

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, Hybrid IP-PBX.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1

Introduction

About this Feature Guide

This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic

Hybrid IP-PBX.

It explains what this PBX can do, and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities.

This manual contains the following sections:

Section 1, Call Handling Features

Provides details about the call handling features.

Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features

Provides details about the system configuration and administration features.

Section 3, Programming

Provides system programming instructions.

Section 4, Appendix

Provides tables listing capacity of system resources, and tones and ring tones. It also provides the list of abbreviations.

Index

Provide feature titles, important words to help you access the required information easily.

Terms used in this Feature Guide

Installation Manual References

The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference.

Feature Guide References

The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference.

User Manual References

The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference.

Abbreviations

There are many abbreviations used in this manual (e.g., "PT" which stands for proprietary telephone). Please refer to the list in this manual (

4.3 List of Abbreviations) for the meaning

of each abbreviation.

About the other manuals

Along with this Feature Guide, the following manuals are available to help you install, and use this PBX:

2 Feature Guide

Installation Manual

Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX.

User Manual

Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs, SLTs, PSs, or DSS Consoles.

Changed from:

The KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, the KX-TDA30GR, and the

KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the:

The KX-TDA15E/KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA15NE/KX-TDA30NE, the KX-TDA15GR/KX-

TDA30GR, and the KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the:

Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country

Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access

The KX-TDA100E/KX-TDA200E, the KX-TDA100NE/KX-TDA200NE, the KX-TDA100GR/

KX-TDA200GR, and the KX-TDA100CE/KX-TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the:

Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country

Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access

Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access

ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)

We, Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd., declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

If you would like to receive a copy of the original Declaration of Conformity of our products which relates to the R&TTE, please visit our web address:

http://doc.panasonic.de

Trademarks

• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.

• Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Notes

• There are some optional service cards, PTs, and features which are not available in some areas. Additionally, there are some optional service cards and features for the

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 which are not available for the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30, or vice versa. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.

• Displays are described in English as samples.

• While all system programming can be performed through PC programming (

2.3.1

PC Programming), PT programming can only cover a subset (

2.3.2 PT

Programming). In Section 1 Call Handling Features and Section 2 System

Configuration and Administration Features, programming references such as "

Date & Time [000]" indicate that system programming can be done by PT

programming.

Feature Guide 3

For further details, please refer to the on-line help of the Maintenance Console (

3.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console).

Feature Highlights

Networking Features

This PBX supports the following networking features:

TIE Line Service

A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations.

(

1.28.1 TIE Line Service)

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line. (

1.28.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN))

QSIG Network

QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network. (

1.28.3 QSIG Network)

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network. (

1.28.4 Voice over Internet

Protocol (VoIP) Network)

Built-in Small Call Centre Features

An incoming call distribution group (

1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features) can

be used as a small call centre with the following features:

Queuing Feature

When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). (

1.2.2.3 Queuing Feature)

Log-in/Log-out

Incoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually. While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up). (

1.2.2.6 Login/Log-out)

VIP Call

It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order. (

1.2.2.4 VIP Call)

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

Connecting a personal computer (PC) to this PBX (via a DPT, or via a Server PC on a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC. (

1.29.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI))

Voice Mail Features

This PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well as DPT

(Digital) Integration. (

1.23 Voice Mail Features)

4 Feature Guide

Parallelled Telephone Features

By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional extension cards. (

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone)

Parallel Mode

An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.

EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode

An SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX.

Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Digital XDP

A DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super

Hybrid port of the PBX. Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Portable Station (PS) Features

PSs (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690) can be connected to this PBX. It is possible to use the

PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone

(Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone. (

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features)

PC Phone/PC Console Features

This PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features.

Feature Guide 5

Table of Contents

1

Call Handling Features ................................................................. 15

1.1

Incoming Call Features........................................................................................ 16

1.1.1

Incoming Trunk Call Features................................................................................. 16

1.1.1.1

Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY......................................................................................... 16

1.1.1.2

Direct In Line (DIL) ............................................................................................................................... 19

1.1.1.3

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) ............................................................................. 21

1.1.1.4

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service ........................................................................... 24

1.1.1.5

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution ......................................................................................... 27

1.1.1.6

Intercept Routing.................................................................................................................................. 29

1.1.1.7

Intercept Routing—No Destination....................................................................................................... 32

1.1.2

Internal Call Features ............................................................................................. 33

1.1.2.1

Internal Call Features—SUMMARY ..................................................................................................... 33

1.1.2.2

Internal Call Block ................................................................................................................................ 34

1.1.3

Incoming Call Indication Features .......................................................................... 36

1.1.3.1

Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY .................................................................................. 36

1.1.3.2

Ring Tone Pattern Selection................................................................................................................. 37

1.1.3.3

Call Waiting .......................................................................................................................................... 38

1.2

Receiving Group Features................................................................................... 40

1.2.1

Idle Extension Hunting ........................................................................................... 40

1.2.2

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features............................................................. 42

1.2.2.1

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY .................................................................... 42

1.2.2.2

Group Call Distribution ......................................................................................................................... 46

1.2.2.3

Queuing Feature .................................................................................................................................. 49

1.2.2.4

VIP Call ................................................................................................................................................ 51

1.2.2.5

Overflow Feature.................................................................................................................................. 52

1.2.2.6

Log-in/Log-out ...................................................................................................................................... 54

1.2.2.7

Supervisory Feature............................................................................................................................. 56

1.3

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features ................................... 58

1.3.1

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) ....................................................... 58

1.3.1.1

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY ............................................................... 58

1.3.1.2

Call Forwarding (FWD)......................................................................................................................... 61

1.3.1.3

Do Not Disturb (DND) .......................................................................................................................... 65

1.4

Answering Features ............................................................................................. 66

1.4.1

Answering Features................................................................................................ 66

1.4.1.1

Answering Features—SUMMARY........................................................................................................ 66

1.4.1.2

Line Preference—Incoming.................................................................................................................. 67

1.4.1.3

Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................................... 68

1.4.1.4

Hands-free Answerback ....................................................................................................................... 69

1.5

Making Call Features ........................................................................................... 70

1.5.1

Predialling............................................................................................................... 70

1.5.2

Automatic Extension Release................................................................................. 71

1.5.3

Intercom Call .......................................................................................................... 72

1.5.4

Trunk Call Features ................................................................................................ 73

1.5.4.1

Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY ........................................................................................................ 73

1.5.4.2

Emergency Call.................................................................................................................................... 74

1.5.4.3

Account Code Entry ............................................................................................................................. 75

1.5.4.4

Dial Type Selection............................................................................................................................... 76

1.5.4.5

Reverse Circuit..................................................................................................................................... 77

1.5.4.6

Pause Insertion .................................................................................................................................... 78

1.5.4.7

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) ....................... 79

1.5.4.8

Special Carrier Access Code ............................................................................................................... 81

1.5.5

Seizing a Line Features.......................................................................................... 82

1.5.5.1

Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY.................................................................................................. 82

6 Feature Guide

1.5.5.2

Line Preference—Outgoing ................................................................................................................. 83

1.5.5.3

Trunk Access ....................................................................................................................................... 84

1.6

Memory Dialling Features ....................................................................................86

1.6.1

Memory Dialling Features .......................................................................................86

1.6.1.1

Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY .............................................................................................. 86

1.6.1.2

One-touch Dialling ............................................................................................................................... 88

1.6.1.3

KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ............................................................ 89

1.6.1.4

Last Number Redial ............................................................................................................................. 90

1.6.1.5

Speed Dialling—Personal/System ....................................................................................................... 91

1.6.1.6

Quick Dialling ....................................................................................................................................... 92

1.6.1.7

Hot Line................................................................................................................................................ 93

1.7

Busy Line/Busy Party Features ...........................................................................94

1.7.1

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) ......................................................................94

1.7.2

Executive Busy Override .........................................................................................95

1.7.3

Call Monitor .............................................................................................................96

1.7.4

Second Call Notification to Busy Extension ............................................................97

1.7.4.1

Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY ................................................................... 97

1.7.4.2

Call Waiting Tone ................................................................................................................................. 99

1.7.4.3

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ............................................................................................... 100

1.7.4.4

Whisper OHCA .................................................................................................................................. 101

1.8

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features ....................................102

1.8.1

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) .........................................................102

1.8.2

Budget Management.............................................................................................107

1.8.3

Extension Lock......................................................................................................108

1.8.4

Dial Tone Transfer .................................................................................................109

1.8.5

Walking COS.........................................................................................................110

1.8.6

Verified Code Entry ...............................................................................................111

1.9

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features .....................................................113

1.9.1

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) .........................................................................113

1.10

Conversation Features .......................................................................................118

1.10.1

Hands-free Operation ...........................................................................................118

1.10.2

Off-hook Monitor ...................................................................................................119

1.10.3

Mute ......................................................................................................................120

1.10.4

Headset Operation ................................................................................................121

1.10.5

Data Line Security.................................................................................................122

1.10.6

Flash/Recall/Terminate .........................................................................................123

1.10.7

External Feature Access (EFA).............................................................................124

1.10.8

Trunk Call Limitation..............................................................................................125

1.10.9

Parallelled Telephone ............................................................................................126

1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .......................................................129

1.11

Transferring Features .........................................................................................130

1.11.1

Call Transfer ..........................................................................................................130

1.12

Holding Features.................................................................................................132

1.12.1

Call Hold ...............................................................................................................132

1.12.2

Call Park................................................................................................................134

1.12.3

Call Splitting ..........................................................................................................135

1.12.4

Music on Hold .......................................................................................................136

1.13

Conference Features ..........................................................................................137

1.13.1

Conference Features ............................................................................................137

1.13.1.1

Conference Features—SUMMARY.................................................................................................... 137

1.13.1.2

Conference ........................................................................................................................................ 138

1.13.1.3

Privacy Release ................................................................................................................................. 140

1.14

Paging Features ..................................................................................................141

Feature Guide 7

1.14.1

Paging .................................................................................................................. 141

1.15

Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ................ 143

1.15.1

Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................... 143

1.16

Optional Device Features .................................................................................. 146

1.16.1

Doorphone Call .................................................................................................... 146

1.16.2

Door Open............................................................................................................ 148

1.16.3

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ............................................................. 149

1.16.4

Background Music (BGM) .................................................................................... 150

1.16.5

Outgoing Message (OGM) ................................................................................... 151

1.16.6

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................................................... 153

1.17

Caller ID Features............................................................................................... 160

1.17.1

Caller ID ............................................................................................................... 160

1.17.2

Incoming Call Log................................................................................................. 165

1.18

Message Features .............................................................................................. 167

1.18.1

Message Waiting .................................................................................................. 167

1.18.2

Absent Message................................................................................................... 170

1.19

Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ............................................................... 171

1.19.1

Fixed Buttons ....................................................................................................... 171

1.19.2

Flexible Buttons .................................................................................................... 174

1.19.3

LED Indication ...................................................................................................... 177

1.19.4

Display Information............................................................................................... 180

1.20

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ....................... 182

1.20.1

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) ......................................................... 182

1.20.1.1

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY ................................................................. 182

1.20.1.2

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) ..................................................... 186

1.20.1.3

Advice of Charge (AOC) .................................................................................................................... 188

1.20.1.4

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)............................................................................................. 189

1.20.1.5

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)................................................................................................ 191

1.20.1.6

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN .............................................................................................................. 193

1.20.1.7

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN .............................................................................................................. 194

1.20.1.8

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN........................................................................................ 195

1.20.1.9

Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ................................................................................................... 196

1.20.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ............................................................................... 197

1.20.1.11 ISDN Extension.................................................................................................................................. 198

1.20.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol ......................................................................................... 200

1.21

E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ............................... 201

1.21.1

E1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................................. 201

1.22

T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ............................... 203

1.22.1

T1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................................. 203

1.23

Voice Mail Features ............................................................................................ 205

1.23.1

Voice Mail (VM) Group ......................................................................................... 205

1.23.2

Voice Mail DTMF Integration ................................................................................ 208

1.23.3

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration...................................................................... 215

1.24

Portable Station (PS) Features.......................................................................... 220

1.24.1

Portable Station (PS) Connection......................................................................... 220

1.24.2

PS Ring Group ..................................................................................................... 222

1.24.3

PS Directory ......................................................................................................... 225

1.24.4

PS Feature Buttons .............................................................................................. 226

1.24.5

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode ................................................................................ 227

1.25

Administrative Information Output Features ................................................... 230

1.25.1

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ......................................................... 230

1.25.2

Charge Meter ....................................................................................................... 236

8 Feature Guide

1.26

Extension Controlling Features.........................................................................239

1.26.1

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)...................................................239

1.26.2

Extension Feature Clear .......................................................................................241

1.26.3

Walking Extension.................................................................................................242

1.26.4

Timed Reminder ...................................................................................................243

1.26.5

Remote Extension Control by User.......................................................................244

1.27

Audible Tone Features........................................................................................245

1.27.1

Dial Tone ...............................................................................................................245

1.27.2

Confirmation Tone.................................................................................................246

1.28

Networking Features...........................................................................................247

1.28.1

TIE Line Service....................................................................................................247

1.28.2

Virtual Private Network (VPN)...............................................................................266

1.28.3

QSIG Network .......................................................................................................268

1.28.3.1

QSIG Network—SUMMARY .............................................................................................................. 268

1.28.3.2

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name

Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG......................................................................... 270

1.28.3.3

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG ........................................................................................................ 272

1.28.3.4

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG ............................................................................................................. 274

1.28.3.5

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG.............................................................. 276

1.28.4

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network .........................................................277

1.29

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features..............................................278

1.29.1

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) ..................................................................278

2

System Configuration and Administration Features............... 281

2.1

System Configuration—Hardware.....................................................................282

2.1.1

Extension Port Configuration ................................................................................282

2.2

System Configuration—Software ......................................................................283

2.2.1

Class of Service (COS).........................................................................................283

2.2.2

Group ....................................................................................................................284

2.2.3

Tenant Service ......................................................................................................287

2.2.4

Time Service .........................................................................................................290

2.2.5

Operator Features.................................................................................................294

2.2.6

Manager Features.................................................................................................295

2.3

System Data Control...........................................................................................297

2.3.1

PC Programming...................................................................................................297

2.3.2

PT Programming ...................................................................................................300

2.3.3

Quick Setup...........................................................................................................302

2.3.4

Automatic Setup....................................................................................................303

2.3.5

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering...................................................................305

2.3.6

Floating Extension ................................................................................................310

2.3.7

Software Upgrading ..............................................................................................311

2.4

Fault Recovery/Diagnostics ...............................................................................312

2.4.1

Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ......................312

2.4.2

Power Failure Restart............................................................................................314

2.4.3

Local Alarm Information ........................................................................................315

3

Programming Instructions ......................................................... 317

3.1

Introduction .........................................................................................................318

3.1.1

Introduction ...........................................................................................................318

3.2

PC Programming.................................................................................................319

3.2.1

Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console..................................................319

3.3

PT Programming .................................................................................................324

Feature Guide 9

3.3.1

Programming Instructions .................................................................................... 324

3.3.2

Basic Programming .............................................................................................. 329

Date & Time [000] .............................................................................................................................. 329

System Speed Dialling Number [001] ................................................................................................ 329

System Speed Dialling Name [002] ................................................................................................... 329

Extension Number [003]..................................................................................................................... 329

Extension Name [004]........................................................................................................................ 330

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005] ....................................................................... 330

Operator Assignment [006] ................................................................................................................ 330

Console Paired Telephone [007] ........................................................................................................ 330

Absent Message [008] ....................................................................................................................... 330

Charge Margin [010] .......................................................................................................................... 331

Charge Tax [011]................................................................................................................................ 331

Charge Rate per Unit [012] ................................................................................................................ 331

3.3.3

System Programming ........................................................................................... 332

Flexible Numbering [100] ................................................................................................................... 332

Time Service Switching Mode [101]................................................................................................... 332

Time Service Starting Time [102] ...................................................................................................... 332

Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103] ............................................................................................... 333

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming [110]....................................................... 333

System Password for User—for PT Programming [111] .................................................................... 333

Manager Password [112] ................................................................................................................... 333

Verified Code [120]............................................................................................................................. 333

Verified Code Name [121] .................................................................................................................. 333

Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122] ................................................................. 333

Verified Code COS Number [123] ...................................................................................................... 334

Decimal Point Position for Currency [130].......................................................................................... 334

Currency [131].................................................................................................................................... 334

Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190]............................................................... 334

3.3.4

Time Programming ............................................................................................... 335

Hold Recall Time [200]....................................................................................................................... 335

Transfer Recall Time [201] ................................................................................................................. 335

Intercept Time [203] ........................................................................................................................... 335

Hot Line Waiting Time [204] ............................................................................................................... 335

Automatic Redial Repeat Times [205]................................................................................................ 335

Automatic Redial Interval [206] .......................................................................................................... 335

Door Open Duration Time [207] ......................................................................................................... 335

Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT [208]............................................................................. 336

DISA Delayed Answer Time [209] ...................................................................................................... 336

DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210] .................................................................................... 336

DISA Intercept Time [211].................................................................................................................. 336

3.3.5

TRS/Barring/ARS Programming........................................................................... 337

TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling [300]...................................................................... 337

TRS/Barring Denied Code [301] ........................................................................................................ 337

TRS/Barring Exception Code [302] .................................................................................................... 337

Special Carrier Access Code [303] .................................................................................................... 337

Emergency Number [304] .................................................................................................................. 337

ARS Mode [320]................................................................................................................................. 337

ARS Leading Number [321] ............................................................................................................... 338

ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322] .............................................................................................. 338

ARS Exception Number [325] ............................................................................................................ 338

ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330]................................................................................................... 338

ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346] ........................................................................................ 339

ARS Carrier Name [350] .................................................................................................................... 339

ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351] ........................................................................................ 339

ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352] ................................................................. 339

ARS Carrier Access Code [353] ........................................................................................................ 339

3.3.6

Trunk Programming .............................................................................................. 340

LCOT/BRI Trunk Connection [400]..................................................................................................... 340

10 Feature Guide

LCOT/BRI Trunk Name [401] ............................................................................................................. 340

LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402] ............................................................................................... 340

LCOT/BRI Trunk Number Reference [409] ........................................................................................ 341

LCOT Dialling Mode [410].................................................................................................................. 341

LCOT Pulse Rate [411] ...................................................................................................................... 341

LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412] ............................................................................................... 341

LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing [413] ......................................................................... 341

LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming [414] ......................................................................... 341

LCOT Reverse Circuit [415] ............................................................................................................... 341

LCOT Pause Time [416] .................................................................................................................... 342

LCOT Flash/Recall Time [417]........................................................................................................... 342

LCOT Disconnect Time [418]............................................................................................................. 342

BRI Network Type [420] ..................................................................................................................... 342

BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421] ..................................................................................................... 342

BRI Subscriber Number [422] ............................................................................................................ 342

BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424] .......................................................................................................... 342

BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425] .......................................................................................................... 343

BRI Configuration [426]...................................................................................................................... 343

BRI TEI Mode [427] ........................................................................................................................... 343

DIL 1:1 Destination [450] ................................................................................................................... 343

DID Number [451] .............................................................................................................................. 343

DID Name [452] ................................................................................................................................. 344

DID Destination [453]......................................................................................................................... 344

Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470] ............................................................................................ 344

Host PBX Access Code [471] ............................................................................................................ 344

Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration [472] .............................................................................................. 344

Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473] ..................................................................................................... 344

DISA Silence Detection [475]............................................................................................................. 345

DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476] ........................................................................................... 345

DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477].................................................................................................... 345

Caller ID Signal Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ............................................ 345

Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only).............................................................. 345

3.3.7

COS Programming................................................................................................346

Trunk Group Number [500] ................................................................................................................ 346

TRS/Barring Level [501]..................................................................................................................... 346

Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502] ................................................................................................... 346

Call Transfer to Trunk [503] ................................................................................................................ 346

Call Forwarding to Trunk [504] ........................................................................................................... 346

Executive Busy Override [505]........................................................................................................... 347

Executive Busy Override Deny [506] ................................................................................................. 347

DND Override [507] ........................................................................................................................... 347

Account Code Mode [508] ................................................................................................................. 347

TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509] .......................................................................... 347

TRS/Barring Level for Extension Lock [510] ...................................................................................... 347

Manager Assignment [511] ................................................................................................................ 347

Permission for Door Open Access [512] ............................................................................................ 348

Time Service Manual Switching [514]................................................................................................ 348

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone [515] ................................................................... 348

Programming Mode Limitation [516] .................................................................................................. 348

3.3.8

Extension Programming........................................................................................349

EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600]................................................................................................. 349

Terminal Device Assignment [601]..................................................................................................... 349

Class of Service [602]........................................................................................................................ 349

User Group [603] ............................................................................................................................... 349

Extension Intercept Destination [604] ................................................................................................ 349

Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605] ........................................................................................... 349

CLIP/COLP Number [606] ................................................................................................................. 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620] ................................................................................ 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing [621] ................................................................... 350

Feature Guide 11

Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622] .................................................. 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623].................................................................................... 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624] .............................................................. 350

Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625] .................................................................................. 351

Overflow Time [626] ........................................................................................................................... 351

Destination When All Busy [627]........................................................................................................ 351

Queuing Call Capacity [628] .............................................................................................................. 351

Queuing Hurry-up Level [629] ............................................................................................................ 351

Queuing Time Table [630] .................................................................................................................. 352

Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631] ........................................................................................... 352

Maximum Number of Agents [632]..................................................................................................... 352

User Groups of a Paging Group [640]................................................................................................ 352

External Pagers of a Paging Group [641]........................................................................................... 352

User Groups of a Pickup Group [650] ................................................................................................ 353

VM Group Floating Extension Number [660] ..................................................................................... 353

Idle Extension Hunting Type [680]...................................................................................................... 353

Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681] ..................................................................................... 353

PS Registration [690] ......................................................................................................................... 354

PS Termination [691].......................................................................................................................... 354

Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692]......................................................... 354

CS Status Reference [699] ................................................................................................................ 354

3.3.9

Resource/Interface Programming......................................................................... 355

External Pager Floating Extension Number [700] .............................................................................. 355

Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200) [710] .................................................................................................................................... 355

Music on Hold [711] ........................................................................................................................... 355

Music for Transfer [712] ...................................................................................................................... 355

Doorphone Call Destination [720] ...................................................................................................... 356

Doorphone Number Reference [729] ................................................................................................. 356

Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]............................................................ 356

Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731] ............................................................................................. 357

DISA Security Mode [732].................................................................................................................. 357

3.3.10

SMDR & Maintenance Programming ................................................................... 358

RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800]...................................................................................... 358

RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate [800] ............................................................................................. 358

RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800].......................................................................................... 358

RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit [800]................................................................................................ 358

RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800]...................................................................................... 358

External Modem Control [801] ........................................................................................................... 358

SMDR Page Length [802] .................................................................................................................. 358

SMDR Skip Perforation [803] ............................................................................................................. 359

SMDR Outgoing Call Printing [804] ................................................................................................... 359

SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805] ................................................................................................... 359

Remote Programming [810] ............................................................................................................... 359

Modem Floating Extension Number [811].......................................................................................... 359

ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number [812]................................................................................ 359

3.3.11

Card Programming ............................................................................................... 360

Slot Card Type Reference [900] ......................................................................................................... 360

Slot Card Deletion [901] ..................................................................................................................... 360

Slot Card Reset [902]......................................................................................................................... 360

OPB3 Option Card Type Reference [910] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ........................................ 360

OPB3 Option Card Deletion [911] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................................... 360

4

Appendix ...................................................................................... 361

4.1

Capacity of System Resources ......................................................................... 362

4.1.1

Capacity of System Resources ............................................................................ 362

4.2

Tones/Ring Tones............................................................................................... 365

4.2.1

Tones/Ring Tones ................................................................................................. 365

12 Feature Guide

4.3

List of Abbreviations ..........................................................................................367

4.3.1

List of Abbreviations..............................................................................................367

4.4

Revision History..................................................................................................369

4.4.1

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Version 1.1 ....................................................................369

4.4.2

KX-TDA30 Version 1.1 ..........................................................................................371

Index .................................................................................................. 373

Feature Guide 13

14 Feature Guide

Section 1

Call Handling Features

Feature Guide 15

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1

Incoming Call Features

1.1.1

Incoming Trunk Call Features

1.1.1.1

Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Description

Incoming calls via a trunk (public line) are distributed to their destination using a suitable distribution feature.

1.

Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type

Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned its networking type: Public,

Private, or VPN (Virtual Private Network).

Trunk

Card

Type

LCOT

DID

Networking

Type

Channel Type

Public

(DIL/DID/

DDI/MSN)

T1

E1

LCOT

GCOT

DID

TIE (E & M)

OPX (EXTN.)

DR2

E & M-C

E & M-P

E&M

BRI/PRI

CO

Extension

QSIG-Master

QSIG-Slave

IP-GW

Note:

*

: Enable (default), : Enable

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*1 :

*2 :

1.28.1 TIE Line Service

1.28.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Private

(TIE)*

1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Virtual Private

Network

(VPN)*

2

16 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

2.

Distribution Feature

One of the following features can be assigned to each trunk port:

Feature

Direct In Line

(DIL)

Direct Inward

Dialling (DID)

Multiple

Subscriber

Number (MSN)

Ringing Service

Description

Directs a call to a preprogrammed single destination (e.g., Operator).

Details in

• 1.1.1.2 Direct In

Line (DIL)

Directs a call with a DID number from a DID line to a preprogrammed destination.

DID is also known as Direct Dialling In (DDI).

• 1.1.1.3 Direct

Inward Dialling

(DID)/Direct

Dialling In (DDI)

Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to a preprogrammed destination.

• 1.1.1.4 Multiple

Subscriber

Number (MSN)

Ringing Service

3.

Destination Change with the Caller’s Identification Number

The Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL/

DID/DDI/MSN features.

Feature Description Details in

Calling Line

Identification

(CLI) Distribution

Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller’s identification number has been assigned to the

Caller ID Table.

• 1.1.1.5 Calling

Line Identification

(CLI) Distribution

4.

Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type

Trunk

Card

Feature

Type

Channel Type

LCOT

DID

LCOT

T1

E1

GCOT

DID

TIE (E & M)

DR2

E & M-C

E & M-P

E&M

BRI

PRI

CO

CO

DIL

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Note:

*

: Enable (default), : Enable

DID/DDI

*

*

*

*

*

MSN

Feature Guide 17

1.1 Incoming Call Features

5.

Available Destination

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

Availability

6.

Intercept Routing

After distribution, the following features may be required.

Feature Description Details in

Intercept

Routing

No Answer

(IRNA)

If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period (Intercept time), it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination.

• 1.1.1.6

Intercept

Routing

Busy/DND

If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination.

No

Destination

If a destination is not assigned, the call is redirected to the operator.

• 1.1.1.7

Intercept

Routing—No

Destination

18 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.2

Direct In Line (DIL)

Description

Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination. Each trunk has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

[Method Flowchart]

A trunk call is received.

Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode?

Yes

CLI works.

No

Yes

Is the CLI destination assigned?

No

Is the DIL destination of the time mode assigned?

Yes

The call is routed to the

DIL destination.

No

The call is routed to the

CLI destination.

The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing

—No Destination).

*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:

If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID

Table, the call will not be routed to the DIL destination, but routed to the CLI destination.

Feature Guide 19

1.1 Incoming Call Features

[Programming Example of DIL Table]

The table can be programmed for each trunk.

Trunk No.

01

02

:

Day Lunch

CLI

Break Night Day

Enable Disable Enable Disable 101

Enable Disable Disable Disable 102

: : : : :

Destination

*

Lunch Break Night

100

100

:

101

102

:

100

100

:

*

:

DIL 1:1 Destination [450]

Note

Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DIL table. Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding trunk. VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration (

1.23.3

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).

Explanation:

If a trunk call is received from trunk 01;

In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.

In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DIL destination, extension 100.

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

2.2.4 Time Service

20 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.3

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Description

Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID/DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. Each DID/DDI number has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night).

[Method Flowchart]

A trunk call is received.

Is the DID/DDI number found in the DID/DDI table?

Yes

Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode?

Yes

CLI works.

No

The call is routed to the operator (Intercept

Routing—No Destination).

No

Yes

Is the CLI destination assigned?

No

Is the DID/DDI destination for the time mode assigned?

Yes

The call is routed to the

DID/DDI destination.

No

The call is routed to the

CLI destination.

The call is routed to the operator (Intercept

Routing—No Destination).

*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:

If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID

Table, the call will not be routed to the DID/DDI destination, but routed to the CLI destination.

Feature Guide 21

1.1 Incoming Call Features

[Programming Example of DID/DDI Table]

DDI can be programmed as DID.

Locat ion

DID/DDI

No.

*1

DID/DDI

Name

*2

CLI DID/DDI Destination

*3

Day Lunch Break Night Day Lunch Break Night

0001 123-4567 John White

Enabl e

Disabl e

Enabl e

Disabl e

105 100

0002 123-2468 Tom Smith

Enabl e

Disabl e

Disabl e

Disabl e

102 100

0003 123-456 A company

Enabl e

Disabl e

Disabl e

Disabl e

101 101

: : : : : : : : :

105

102

101

:

100

100

100

:

*1

:

*2

:

*3

:

DID Number [451]

DID Name [452]

DID Destination [453]

Note

Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DID/DDI table.

Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding DID/DDI number. VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT

(Digital) Integration (

1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).

Explanation:

If the DID/DDI number is "123-4567":

1. Checks the number in the table.

Matches the number in location 0001.

2. Checks the time mode.

In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.

In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DID/DDI destination, extension 100.

Conditions

• To use this feature, the DID/DDI service must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method (

BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421] *For BRI only).

DID/DDI Number Modification

It is possible to modify a received DID/DDI number, which may be convenient when programming the DID/DDI table. Modification method (removed number of digits/added number) can be programmed on a trunk port basis.

[Modification Example]

Removed number of digits: 6

Added number: 10

Modified DID/DDI number: 876543 21 = 1021

Received DID/DDI number: 87654321

1) Remove the

2) Add "10".

first 6 digits.

22 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

The Inter-digit Time

When the Inter-digit time expires, the PBX stops receiving DID/DDI number and starts to check the DID/DDI table. (Refer to the [Programming Example of DID/DDI Table] above).

Even if the Inter-digit time does not expire, the PBX stops receiving the DID/DDI number when the received number is found in the DID/DDI table. The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination. If the received number matches several DID/DDI numbers in the table, the DID/DDI number of the lowest numbered location has priority.

[Example] If a call is received in Lunch mode;

Destination Explanation Received

Number

123-4567 Extn. 100

123-456 Extn. 101

The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving "7". So the call is routed to extension 100.

The Inter-digit time expired after receiving "6". The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table. So the call is routed to extension 101.

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

2.2.4 Time Service

Feature Guide 23

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.4

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Description

Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line call with an

MSN to a preprogrammed destination. One ISDN-BRI port can support a maximum of 10

MSNs. Each MSN has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

Point-to-multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration (

BRI Configuration [426]).

[Method Flowchart]

A trunk call is received.

Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table?

Yes

Is the MSN found in the

MSN table?

Yes

Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode?

Yes

CLI works.

No

The call is routed to the operator (Intercept

Routing—No Destination).

No

The call is ignored.

No

Yes

Is the CLI destination assigned?

No

Is the MSN destination for the time mode assigned?

No

Yes

The call is routed to the

CLI destination.

The call is routed to the

MSN destination.

The call is routed to the operator (Intercept

Routing—No Destination).

*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:

If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID

Table, the call will not be routed to the MSN destination, but routed to the CLI destination.

24 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

[Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1]

A table can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations.

Locat ion

MSN

01

02

:

10

123-

4567

123-

2468

:

:

MSN

Name

A

Company

C

Company

:

:

CLI MSN Destination

Day Lunch Break Night Day Lunch Break Night

Enable

Disabl e

Enable

Disabl e

Enable

:

:

Disabl e

:

:

Disabl e

:

:

Disabl e

:

:

101

102

:

:

100

100

:

:

101

102

:

:

100

100

:

:

Note

Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the MSN table.

Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding MSN. VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration (

1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).

Explanation:

If the MSN "123-4567" is received from BRI port 1:

1. Checks the number in the table.

Matches the number in location 01.

2. Checks the time mode.

In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.

In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to MSN destination, extension 100.

Conditions

• To use this feature, the MSN service must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method (

BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421]).

MSN Modification

It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter, which may be convenient when programming the MSN table. Modification method (removed number of digits/added number) can be programmed on a trunk port basis.

[Modification Example]

Removed number of digits: 6

Added number: 10

Received MSN: 87654321

Modified MSN: 876543 21 = 1021

1) Remove the first

6 digits.

2) Add "10".

• When using point-to-multipoint configuration with a BRI, do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX. As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI, the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels.

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Feature Guide 25

1.1 Incoming Call Features

2.2.4 Time Service

26 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.5

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Description

Directs an incoming trunk call to a destination when the caller’s identification number (e.g.,

Caller ID) matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table which is used as the Caller

ID Table. Each Caller ID number (telephone number for each System Speed Dialling number) can have its own destination.

CLI Feature

Caller ID (KX-TDA30/KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Calling Line Identification

Presentation (CLIP)

Automatic Number

Identification (ANI) (KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Description Details in

Caller’s number is sent from an analogue trunk.

• 1.17.1 Caller

ID

Caller’s number is sent from an ISDN line. • 1.20.1.2

Calling/

Connected

Line

Identification

Presentation

(CLIP/COLP)

Caller’s number is sent from an E1 or T1 line.

• 1.21.1 E1

Line Service

(KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200 only)

• 1.22.1 T1

Line Service

(KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200 only)

CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods:

a)

DIL

b)

DID/DDI

c)

MSN Ringing Service

Each trunk (for DIL) and the DID/DDI/MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

2.2.4 Time Service).

When the call has its Caller ID and the CLI is enabled for the time mode, the call will be handled by the CLI method.

[Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI]

Location

(System Speed

Dialling No.)

000

001

:

Telephone No.

901234567890

:

:

*1

System Speed

Dialling Name

*2

ABC Company

:

:

CLI Destination

200

:

:

Feature Guide 27

1.1 Incoming Call Features

*1

:

*2

:

System Speed Dialling Number [001]

System Speed Dialling Name [002]

Explanation:

If the caller’s number is "0123-456-7890" (The Trunk Access number is disregarded.):

1. Checks the number in the table.

Matches the number in location 000.

2. The call is routed to the CLI destination, extension 200.

Conditions

Automatic Caller ID Number Modification

The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number

Modification. (

1.17.1 Caller ID)

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

28 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.6

Intercept Routing

Description

Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls. There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows:

Feature Description

Intercept Routing—No

Answer (IRNA)

If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period (Intercept time) (

Intercept Time [203]), it is

redirected to the preprogrammed destination.

Intercept Routing—

Busy/DND

If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination.

The available intercept destination is as follows:

Type 1: The destination assigned on the extension port which the original destination joins.

(

Extension Intercept Destination [604])

Type 2: The destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call.

(

Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470])

Original Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN

Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

Type 1

The Available Intercept Destination

Type 1

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call

Distribution Group works (

1.2.2.5 Overflow

Feature). The overflow destination is assigned on

the incoming call distribution group which the original destination joins (

Destination for

Overflow Time Expiration [625]).

Type 2

Type 2

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Type 2

Type 2*

Not available Analogue/ISDN Remote

Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. +

Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no

PBX Code)

Not available

Not available

Not available

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX

Code)

Not available

Feature Guide 29

1.1 Incoming Call Features

*: This is applied only when a trunk call arrives on a DISA line but the line is busy at that time.

Once the call reaches the destination extension by using the DISA feature, the Intercept

Routing feature of the extension works.

Each of them can have different intercept destinations for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night) (

2.2.4 Time Service).

[Available Intercept Destination]

Intercept Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

Availability

Conditions

Intercept Routing—Busy/DND on/off

Each Intercept Routing—Busy and Intercept Routing—DND can be enabled or disabled through system programming.

If disabled, one of the following is activated depending on the trunk card type which a call arrives through:

a)

LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) Card: The incoming trunk call will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.

b)

Other Trunk Cards: A busy tone will be sent to the caller.

If the intercept destination cannot receive the call: a)

Intercept Routing—No Answer: Intercept timer will restart at the original destination, until the call is answered.

b)

Intercept Routing—Busy/DND: The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card. When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear a busy tone.

Idle Extension Hunting

If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group, calls to that extension will not be redirected by Intercept Routing—Busy/DND. If the extension is busy or in DND mode, calls to that extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group.

30 Feature Guide

Feature Guide References

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Feature Guide 31

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1.7

Intercept Routing—No Destination

Description

Provides automatic redirection of an incoming trunk call which does not have a destination assigned. The intercept destination is an operator (tenant/PBX) (

Operator Assignment [006]

*For PBX operator only).

Conditions

Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off

The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming.

If disabled, reorder tone will be sent to the caller. However, the Intercept Routing—No

Destination feature always works for calls through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card even when disabled.

If an operator (tenant/PBX) is not assigned:

The lowest jack numbered extension will be the intercept destination.

Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to:

Calls from doorphones.

Feature Guide References

2.2.5 Operator Features

32 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.2

Internal Call Features

1.1.2.1

Internal Call Features—SUMMARY

Description

The following incoming calls reach their destination:

Feature Description Details in

Intercom Call

A call from one extension to another.

• 1.5.3

Intercom Call

Doorphone Call

When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination, the recipient can talk to the visitor.

• 1.16.1

Doorphone

Call

[Available Destination]

The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night) (

2.2.4 Time Service) on a doorphone port basis (

Doorphone Call Destination

[720]).

Destination

Calling from

Extension Doorphone

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

: Available

Feature Guide 33

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.2.2

Internal Call Block

Description

Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis. Each COS of the caller can enable or disable this feature for each COS of the called party.

[Programming Example]

Caller

Called Party

COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 ...

COS 1

COS 2

:

COS 3

: : : :

: Block

Explanation:

a) COS 1 can make calls to all extensions.

b) COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only. (COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2.)

c) COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only.

COS 1

Extn. 100 Extn. 101

COS 2 COS 3

Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106

Conditions

• Restricted extension numbers cannot be the parameter of the feature settings (e.g.,

Walking Extension).

• All extensions can make an Operator Call (

2.2.5 Operator Features) regardless of the

Internal Call Block.

34 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

• This feature can also restrict calling a doorphone from an extension on a COS of the extension and a COS of the doorphone port basis. Each doorphone port can be assigned a COS. (

1.16.1 Doorphone Call)

Feature Guide 35

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3

Incoming Call Indication Features

1.1.3.1

Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY

Description

Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows:

Type

Ring Tone

Feature

Ring Tone

Pattern

Selection

Voice-calling Alternate

Receiving—

Ring/Voice

LED

(LED: Light

Emitting

Diode)

LED Indication

Description Details in

A telephone rings when receiving a call. The ring tone patterns can be changed for each incoming call type.

• 1.1.3.2

Ring Tone

Pattern

Selection

A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming.

The light shows line conditions with a variety of light patterns.

• 1.5.3

Intercom

Call

• 1.19.3

LED

Indication

Display

(Caller’s

Information)

Display

Information

External Pager Trunk Answer from Any

Station

(TAFAS)

Tone/Voice during a

Conversation

Call Waiting

The display shows the caller’s information.

The external pager sends a ring tone when receiving a call.

• 1.19.4

Display

Information

• 1.16.3

Trunk

Answer

From Any

Station

(TAFAS)

A busy extension hears a tone, or voice from the handset/built-in speaker indicating that another incoming call is waiting.

• 1.1.3.3

Call Waiting

36 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3.2

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Description

A ring tone pattern can be selected for each incoming call type on a Ring Tone Pattern Table basis, which can be assigned for each extension.

[Ring Tone Patterns]

1 280 ms

Single

Double

Triple

S-Double

[Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table]

There are a specified number of programmable tables each of which allows the assignment of ring tone patterns for the following incoming call types:

For trunk calls (including trunk call hold recalls) and doorphone calls, select ring tone patterns on a trunk group or a doorphone port basis.

Table

No.

Intercom

Call/Hold

Recall

Trunk Call/Hold

Recall

Doorphone Call

TRG1 TRG2 ...

Port 1 Port 2 ...

1

2

:

Double

Single

:

Single

Double

: : :

Single

Double

: : :

Timed

Reminder

Call

Back

LCS

: : :

Each extension can select one of the tables.

Conditions

• "

PT Ring off Setting

" can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, PT users cannot set the ring off.

Feature Guide 37

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.3.3

Call Waiting

Description

Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting. The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.

The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type:

a)

Call Waiting Tone: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker

b)

OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker

c)

Whisper OHCA: Voice from the handset

d)

Off: No notification.

Intercom Call

Trunk Call*

Call Type

Notification Method

DPT Other Telephone

Call Waiting tone/OHCA/

Whisper OHCA/Off

Call Waiting tone/Off

Call Waiting tone/Off

*: Including a doorphone call, call via an incoming call distribution group, and a transferred trunk call from another extension.

This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling (BSS).

Conditions

• Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group (DPT/DTMF) is not available.

Data Line Security

Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. (

1.10.5 Data Line Security)

Call Waiting Tone

A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for trunk call and intercom call if "

Tone 2

" has been selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). If

"

Tone 1

" has been selected, the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both trunk call and intercom call.

All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default (

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).

Caller Information

With the Call Waiting tone, the caller’s information flashes on the display for five seconds at 15-second intervals.

Call Waiting from the Telephone Company

Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from your telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting. He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. For details, consult your telephone company.

Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only):

With the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, the

Caller ID number can be received and flash on the display twice for five seconds at 15second intervals.

38 Feature Guide

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Feature Guide References

1.7.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting

1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper

OHCA)

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

Feature Guide 39

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2

Receiving Group Features

1.2.1

Idle Extension Hunting

Description

If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming (

Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681]). Idle

extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type (

Idle

Extension Hunting Type [680]).

This feature is also known as Station Hunting.

Type

Circular Hunting

Description

An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way.

Incoming call

Extn.

Assigned order

Busy

Extn.

Extn.

Extn.

Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension.

Incoming call

Extn.

Assigned order

Busy

Extn.

Extn.

Extn.

Conditions

Idle Extension Hunting applies to:

Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls to a single destination.

• An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group.

40 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

If all the searched extensions are busy:

The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

2.2.4 Time

Service).

[Available Destination]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

Availability

FWD/DND Mode

While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension which has set FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group.

Feature Guide References

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

Feature Guide 41

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

1.2.2.1

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Description

An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming (

Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]). An incoming call

distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number.

Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy, the incoming calls can wait in a queue.

Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls. Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension).

Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with

Diagram

A through F in the table are described in the following diagram.

:

3

A

1

2

Group Floating

No.

Extn. No.

*1

290

291

Group

Name

*2

Sales

Engineering

B C

Distribution

Method

*3

Max. No. of

Busy

Extensions

*4

Ring 3

UCD Max.

D

Queuing

Call

Capacity

*5

E F

Hurry-up Overflow

Level

*6

Time

*7

5

11

3

8

60

90

Overflow Destination

*8

Day

...

...

Night

100

...

...

100

200

...

...

200

1

5

Tenant

No.

*9

*1

:

*2

:

*3

:

*4

:

Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622]

Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623]

Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624]

Maximum Number of Agents [632]

*5

:

*6

:

*7

:

*8

:

Queuing Call Capacity [628]

Queuing Hurry-up Level [629]

Overflow Time [626]

Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625]/Destination When All Busy [627]

*9

:

Tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

2.2.4 Time Service) and the music source (for Music on Hold) for each group.

42 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1.

D

Queuing Feature

Five calls are waiting in a queue.

B

Group Call Distribution

Calls are distributed by the assigned method.

(Only three extensions

[agents] can answer the

Supervisor Extension

*

11

Extn.

100

Monitors or controls the incoming call distribution group status.

Extn.

101

Extn.

102

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Extn.

103

F

E

Extn.

104

Overflow Feature

a) Sends a busy tone (Busy on Busy), or b) Redirects to the overflow destination.

Manual Queue Redirection

*

10

The longest waiting call in a queue can be redirected to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button. The button shows the Hurryup status.

Extn.

105

A Incoming Call

Distribution Group 1

(Floating extension no.: 290,

Name: Sales)

Log-in

Extn.

105

Log-out

*

12

*10 :

*11 :

*12 :

1.2.2.3 Queuing Feature

1.2.2.7 Supervisory Feature

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out

1.

Group Call Distribution [

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution]

Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods:

Distribution Method

Uniform Call

Distribution (UCD)

Priority Hunting

Ring

Description

Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is received.

An idle extension is searched in the specified order.

All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously.

2.

Queuing Feature [

1.2.2.3 Queuing Feature]

If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue.

While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can be sent to the waiting callers.

3.

VIP Call [

1.2.2.4 VIP Call]

It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that an incoming

Feature Guide 43

1.2 Receiving Group Features

call can be received from the groups in priority order.

4.

Overflow Feature [

1.2.2.5 Overflow Feature]

A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued

(Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group). It is also possible to send a busy tone (Busy on Busy) or disconnect the line.

5.

Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature

Feature

Log-in/Log-out

Description Details in

Member extensions can join the group to handle calls (Log-in) or leave the group for a break (Log-out).

They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions.

• 1.2.2.6 Login/Log-out

Supervisory

Feature

Incoming

Call Queue

Monitor

The supervisor extension can monitor various information about the incoming calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display.

Log-in/Logout Monitor and Remote

Control

Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the group members.

Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members.

• 1.2.2.7

Supervisory

Feature

Conditions

• One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups.

ICD Group button

An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group.

One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups (Multiple ICD Group). If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the ICD Group button is not assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button.

Even though an extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension has not been programmed to be included through system programming (

Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]), the ICD Group button

will not receive calls to that group.

Group FWD

The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis.

COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups

Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number. Group FWD to an outside party can be enabled or disabled for each COS. The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the Internal Call Block feature; when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group, the PBX checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block).

44 Feature Guide

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Feature Guide 45

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2.2

Group Call Distribution

Description

The Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents)

(

Maximum Number of Agents [632]) are available to accept a call. When incoming calls

exceed the number, the calls enter a queue (

1.2.2.3 Queuing Feature).

1.

Distribution Method

There are three distribution methods which can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group (

Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624]).

Distribution

Method

Uniform Call

Distribution

(UCD)

Description

Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the extension which received the last call.

Extn.

A

Extn.

B

Extn.

C

Extn.

D

Received the last call.

Starts searching from extn. B. (Skips extn. A.)

Priority Hunting

An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group.

1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd ....

Extn.

A

Extn.

B

Extn.

C

Extn.

D

Ring

Always starts searching from the first assigned extension.

All extensions in the group ring simultaneously.

Delayed Ringing:

Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group (

Incoming Call Distribution Group

Delayed Ringing [621]). The call can be answered by pressing the

flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set.

Extn.

A

Extn.

B

Extn.

C

Extn.

D

Rings immediately simultaneously.

Delayed Ringing:

Rings after a specified time delay.

46 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

2.

Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting)

When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group, the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature:

• Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution method for waiting calls.

• Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. (

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting)

[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]

Programming Conditions

Group Call

Waiting Mode

Distribution

All

Group Call

Distribution Method

UCD

Priority Hunting

Ring

UCD/Priority Hunting/

Ring

Result

Group Call Waiting

Distribution Method

UCD

Priority Hunting

Not available*

Ring

Capable

Telephone

PT/PS with idle

ICD Group button

Any telephone

*: Incoming calls enter the queue immediately. Member extensions do not receive the

Call Waiting tone.

[Example]

Group Call Waiting mode: All

Group call distribution method for idle extensions: UCD

All extensions hear the Call

Waiting tone (Ring).

[ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting]

The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting

Distribution method as follows:

a)

Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions

(even when the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call — additional calls will wait in a queue.

b)

UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD

Group button located on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type: UCD or Priority Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied — additional calls will wait in a queue.

Note

In the method b), if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied, the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension.

Feature Guide 47

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group 1

(Floating extension no.: 200)

3

2

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group 2

(Floating extension no.: 300)

1

ICD Group 200 (Call Waiting)

ICD Group 200 (Call Waiting)

ICD Group 300 (Answering the Call)

3.

No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method)

If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No Answer time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member, the call queues at target extension until a group member becomes available.

Conditions

FWD/DND Extension

System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring the extension which has FWD or DND feature set. If it rings, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. (

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))

• Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature (

1.2.2.4 VIP Call)

and/or Wrap-up feature (

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out). Because to use the VIP Call feature

and/or Wrap-up feature, Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off.

48 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2.3

Queuing Feature

Description

When a preprogrammed number of extensions (

Maximum Number of Agents [632]) in an

incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can be in the waiting queue is programmable (

Queuing Call Capacity

[628]).

While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table (

Queuing Time Table [630]), which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night)

(

2.2.4 Time Service). Each Queuing Time Table has a specified number of sequences. The

following procedures are provided to make up a Queuing Time Table:

[Procedure Table]

Command Description Condition

OGM a

An outgoing message (OGM) a

(01–64 [with the KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200] or 01–32 [with the KX-

TDA15/KX-TDA30]) is sent to the caller.

After the outgoing message (OGM),

Music on Hold will be sent and redirects to the next sequence.

b

×

5 s

Puts the caller in the waiting queue for b (01–16)

×

5 seconds.

If an outgoing message (OGM) has not been sent to the caller, the caller hears a ringback tone.

If an outgoing message (OGM) has been sent to the caller, the caller hears

Music on Hold.

Sequence c

Redirects to sequence c (01–16). None

Overflow

Redirects to overflow destination. None

Disconnect

Disconnects the line.

None

None

(No command)

Redirects to the next sequence. If assigned on sequence 01, the

Queuing Time Table will not be activated.

[Programming Example of Queuing Time Table]

Queuing

Time

Table

No.

Sequence

01

Sequence

Sequence

02

Sequence

03

*1

Sequence

04

01 OGM 01 6

×

5 s OGM 03 Overflow

02

03

: : : : :

...

Sequence

16

*2

: :

*1

:

Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631]

*2

:

The call will be disconnected if the destination is not determined after sequence 16.

Feature Guide 49

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01:

The call queues.

Sequence 01

OGM 01 is sent.

Thank you for calling Panasonic.

The department you are calling is busy.

Please hold the line.

We will answer your call shortly.

Queuing Time Table 01

Sequence 02

Music on Hold is sent for 30 seconds.

Sequence 03

OGM 03 is sent.

We are sorry to keep you holding.

The department is still busy. We are transferring you to the operator.

Sequence 04

Redirects to the overflow destination.

Overflow destination answers.

The call is connected to the member extension as soon as the extension becomes available.

Conditions

If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the

Queuing Time Table:

Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires.

Manual Queue Redirection

It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button. (When the call is already ringing on any extension, the call is not redirected.)

This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.

Hurry-up Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable (

Queuing Hurryup Level [629]). The button shows the current status as follows:

Off

Light Pattern

Red on

Calls in the Waiting Queue

No queued call

At or under the assigned number for Hurry-up

Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry-up

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.5 Overflow Feature

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.8.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)

50 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2.4

VIP Call

Description

It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.

Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority. When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly.

[Example]

In the call centre, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode.

Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/DDI/CLI.

(The number in the circle is the queuing order.)

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group 1

(for VIP)

6

1

1st

Priority

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group 2

(for general customers)

5

3

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group 3

(for special customers)

3rd

Priority

4

2

2nd

Priority

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group 4

(for general customers)

3rd

Priority

8

7

Extn.

101

Extn.

102

Extn.

103

Distribution order:

1 6 2 4 3 7 5 8

From: Group 1 Group 3 Groups 2 and 4

Feature Guide 51

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2.5

Overflow Feature

Description

When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity (

Queuing Call Capacity [628]), they

may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features:

1) Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group

2) Busy on Busy

1.

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group

The Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions:

a)

There is no space in the waiting queue.

b)

The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.

c)

An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table.

d)

The Overflow time (

Overflow Time [626]) expires.

e)

Manual Queue Redirection is performed.

[Available Destination]

The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

2.2.4 Time Service). The two different

destinations can be assigned, one for the a) and b) (

Destination When All Busy [627]),

and one for c), d), and e) (

Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625]).

Availability Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

52 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

2.

Busy on Busy

The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions:

a)

There is no space in the Waiting queue.

b)

The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.

[Example of a)]

When the answering agent number (

Maximum Number of Agents [632]) is "2", and the

queuing call number (

Queuing Call Capacity [628]) is "0":

There are five assistants in the shop. If two of them are engaged on the phone, the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed.

Conditions

[Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group]

If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable: a)

If the trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card: (1) The line is disconnected when the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message (OGM) was sent to the call, or when the call reached an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)). (2) Except

for the above, redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.

b)

If the call arrives through the other cards: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.

[Busy on Busy]

• If a trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, a busy tone will not be sent to the caller.

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.3 Queuing Feature

Feature Guide 53

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2.6

Log-in/Log-out

Description

Incoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually.

They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls.

Wrap-up:

While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up time). While Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that he can make some report or etc.

Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button.

[Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example]

<When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method>

Incoming call

Log-in

Ready

Waiting for a call

Extn.

101

Ready

Extn.

102

Extn.

103

Extn.

104

Extn.

105

Extn.

106

Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready

Answering a call

Press the

Wrap-up button.

The Wrap-up time expires.

Not Ready

Making a report/ temporary break

After completing the call

Press the

Wrap-up button.

Wrap-up

Making a report

Extn.

102

Log-out

Conditions

• It is programmable whether the last remaining logged-in extension can log out.

Log-in/Log-out Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters:

Parameter

No parameter

Usage

Used with an ICD Group button, or with a floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group, or with (All).

Light Pattern

Red on Off

54 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Parameter Usage

Light Pattern

Red on Off

Floating extension number of a specified incoming call distribution group

Used to log-in or log-out from the specified incoming call distribution group.

Log-out

Status

(All)

Log-in

Status

Used to log-in or log-out from all incoming call distribution groups to which you belong.

After Logout

Operation

After Login

Operation

• If an ICD Group button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group. The light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button which includes the group number.

Wrap-up Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows:

Light pattern

Slow red flashing

Red on

Off

Wrap-up

Not Ready

Status

Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel)

• When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call, neither the PS nor its wired telephone can have Wrap-up time. (

1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

Automatic Log-out

A member extension may be logged-out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups. It is possible to return to the log-in mode manually.

Automatic Log-out feature does not work for the extension in an incoming call distribution group in Ring distribution method (

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution).

Log-in/Log-out Monitor

The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members. (

1.2.2.7 Supervisory Feature)

Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR

Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. (

1.25.1 Station Message

Detail Recording (SMDR))

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.8.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)

Feature Guide 55

1.2 Receiving Group Features

1.2.2.7

Supervisory Feature

Description

An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control each member’s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6-line display PT.

Feature Description

Incoming Call Queue

Monitor

The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the display.

Log-in/Log-out

Monitor and Remote

Control

Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members through the corresponding DSS button light.

Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button.

[Example]

<Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display>

31 Jan. 08:13AM FRI

250:Sales Section

Waiting Calls Now :00006

Max. Waiting Time :05'10

--- Date and time

--- Floating extension number/name of incoming call distribution group

--- The number of queuing calls

--- The longest queuing time

EXIT LOG SPRVS

Since 29 JAN. 09:10AM

Total Calls :00996

Overflow Calls :00131

Lost Calls :00039

Average Waiting :02'12

EXIT CLEAR

--- Monitoring starting date and time

--- Total number of incoming calls

--- Total number of overflowed calls

--- The number of lost calls

--- Average queuing time

<Log-in/Log-out Monitor/Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light>

31 Jan. 08:13AM FRI

250:Sales Section

Waiting Calls Now :00006

Max. Waiting Time :05'10

With

EXIT

Log-in/Log-out Monitor

DSS buttons of the incoming call distribution group members show their status.

Light pattern Status

Green on Log-in (Ready)

Slow Green Flashing Log-in (Not Ready)

Red on

Off

Log-out

Extension in another incoming call distribution group

Log-in/Log-out Remote Control

Pressing the button changes the status as follows:

Status Light pattern

Log-out

Log-in (Ready)

Red on

Green on

56 Feature Guide

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Conditions

Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a)

One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group, but it need not belong to the group.

b)

One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group.

Available Paired DSS Console

The KX-T7640, KX-T7440, and KX-T7441 are available for this feature.

Accumulation Value Clear

Accumulation value (total incoming calls/total overflowed calls/lost calls/average queuing time) can be cleared manually. The date and time of clearing is saved and it is shown on the display (monitoring starting date and time). When the value exceeds 99999, before clearing, "****" will be shown.

If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed:

If the display is in idle status, it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically.

If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group, it will not change.

Other Features while in Monitor Mode

The supervisor extension can use other features (making calls, pressing the MESSAGE button, etc.) even while in monitor mode. When each operation is finished, his telephone returns to the queue monitor display.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.8.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group

(Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor)

Feature Guide 57

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

1.3

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb

(DND) Features

1.3.1

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

1.3.1.1

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—

SUMMARY

Description

When an extension user cannot answer calls (e.g., busy, not at the desk), it is possible to forward or refuse the calls using the following features:

1) Call Forwarding (FWD)

2) Do Not Disturb (DND)

1.

FWD

Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations. (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))

2.

DND

An extension user can send the tone to let the caller know he is not available. (

1.3.1.3

Do Not Disturb (DND))

Conditions

FWD and DND features apply to:

Intercom calls (including doorphone calls), and trunk calls (including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold.)

FWD/DND Button

Both the FWD and DND features for the extension can be customised on a flexible button.

Only one of the features will work at a time.

Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customised on an extension.

Group FWD Button

The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button. Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension.

[FWD/DND Button and Group FWD Button Types]

Type

FWD/DND for

Extension

FWD/DND—Internal

FWD/DND—External

FWD/DND—Both

Description

Works for incoming intercom calls

Works for incoming trunk calls

Works for all incoming calls

58 Feature Guide

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Type Description

FWD for

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group

Group FWD—Internal Works for incoming intercom calls

Group FWD—External Works for incoming trunk calls

Group FWD—Both Works for all incoming calls

[Button Status—FWD/DND Button]

The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern

Red on

Slow red flashing

Off

Status (default)

FWD on

DND on

FWD/DND off

The functions assigned to the "on" and "flashing" patterns can be changed through system programming.

[Button Status—Group FWD Button]

The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern

Red on

Off

Status (default)

FWD on

FWD off

[Mode Change]

When either the FWD or DND feature is assigned, pressing the FWD/DND button changes the on/off setting alternately. When both the features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the settings as follows:

FWD DND Off

Note

Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) in idle status will produce one of the following results, selected through system programming:

When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:

Pressing the button will enter personal programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.

When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:

Pressing the button will cycle the settings as shown above in [Mode Change].

A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle

Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.

• When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from trunk calls (forwarding type, forward destination, DND on/off), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/

DND—Internal and FWD/DND—External, and/or Group FWD—Internal and Group

FWD—External, because:

a)

the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) and the Group FWD—Both button will indicate the setting for either trunk calls

Feature Guide 59

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

or intercom calls, but not both.

Note

The FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for trunk calls only.

b)

pressing the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group FWD—Both button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and trunk calls separately.

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Fixed Buttons

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

60 Feature Guide

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

1.3.1.2

Call Forwarding (FWD)

Description

Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations.

The circumstances under which the calls are forwarded are as follows:

All Calls

Busy

Type

No Answer

Busy/No Answer

Circumstance

Any time

Follow Me:

When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.

When the extension user’s line is busy.

When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time (

Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605]).

When the extension user’s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time (

Call Forwarding—No Answer

Time [605]).

Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls, it is possible to set different destination for each.

Extension

Forwards to

Another Extension

Trunk Calls to

Extension

Available Forwarding Type:

All Calls

Busy

No Answer

Busy/No Answer

Forwards to

Outside Party

Incoming Call Distribution Group

Intercom Calls to

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Trunk Calls to

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Forwards to

Another Extension

Forwards to

Outside Party

Available Forwarding Type: All Calls

Feature Guide 61

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

[Available Destination]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-

OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

Availability

Condition for Original

Extension/Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Only available when FWD to extension is allowed through

COS programming.*

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

Only available for incoming trunk calls. Incoming intercom and doorphone calls cannot be forwarded to a DISA floating extension number.

Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through

COS programming.

Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through

COS programming.

*: If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call

Block), the FWD feature to the extension does NOT work.

Conditions

[General]

FWD for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls

The FWD feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.

FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD)

COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature.

FWD to Trunk

COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally (

Call Forwarding to Trunk [504]).

The original extension’s TRS/Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call.

62 Feature Guide

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Trunk Call Duration

If a call between an extension user and an outside party, or between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer (

Extension-to-Trunk

Call Duration [472] and Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473]). If the timer expires, the line will

be disconnected. (

1.10.8 Trunk Call Limitation)

Multiple FWD

Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as

Multiple FWD:

– FWD—Busy or Busy/No Answer (in case a destination extension is busy), or All

Calls

– Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow

– Intercept Routing—Busy/DND (in case a destination extension is busy or in DND mode)

– Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow

Incoming call

A

Original destination

1

B

2

C

3

D

4

E

5

F

In the above illustration, forwarding stops at the extension E. However, forwarding can go farther in the following cases:

– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD—No Answer or Busy/No Answer feature.

– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the Intercept Routing—No Answer feature.

– If a call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group, and then the call is redirected to the overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table. (

1.2.2.3

Queuing Feature)

In the above cases, the forwarding counters reset to zero, and calls can be forwarded up to four times again from the applicable extension that occurred in the case above.

Incoming call

A

Original destination

1

B

2

C

3 1

D

FWD—No Answer

E

2

F

Boss & Secretary feature

It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting.

FWD—All Calls

Incoming call

Boss

(Original)

Call or transfer a call

Secretary

(FWD destination)

Feature Guide 63

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Message Waiting

While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The Message button light turns on at the originally called extension. (

1.18.1 Message Waiting)

Idle Extension Hunting

Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group.

[All Calls and Busy]

• If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call:

– Doorphone call

– Trunk calls via the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) cards

[No Answer and Busy/No Answer]

No Answer Time

The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension (

Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605]).

[Follow Me]

• This feature is only available when the original extension has disabled the "

Deny Remote

Operation by Other Extension

" setting on a COS basis.

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

1.2.2.5 Overflow Feature

User Manual References

User Manual

1.5.1 Forwarding Calls

64 Feature Guide

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

1.3.1.3

Do Not Disturb (DND)

Description

An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension, but arrive at other extension by using the Idle Extension Hunting feature (

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting) or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature (

1.1.1.6 Intercept

Routing). When a destination cannot be found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone,

while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone.

Conditions

DND for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls

The DND feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.

DSS button in DND Mode

The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND.

DND Override

An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS (

DND Override [507]).

Paging DND

It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. (

1.14.1 Paging)

Intercept Routing—Busy/DND

If a call arrives at the extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature.

Idle Extension Hunting

While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension which has DND set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination.

• If (1) the trunk call via the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card arrives at the extension in DND mode and (2) the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group, then the original extension in

DND mode will ring.

• Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])

Feature Guide 65

1.4 Answering Features

1.4

Answering Features

1.4.1

Answering Features

1.4.1.1

Answering Features—SUMMARY

Description

An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods:

Destination

At the own

extension

(PT only)

Feature

Line

Preference—

Incoming

Description Details in

A user can select the line seized when going off-hook.

• 1.4.1.2

Line

Preference

—Incoming

A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the flashing button.

Direct Onetouch

Answering

Hands-free

Answerback

At another extension

Call Pickup—

Directed/Group

A user can receive a call automatically and establish a hands-free conversation.

• 1.4.1.4

Hands-free

Answerback

A user can pick up a specified extension’s call or a call in a specified call pickup group.

• 1.4.1.3 Call

Pickup

66 Feature Guide

1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1.2

Line Preference—Incoming

Description

A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences:

Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming).

Type

No Line

Prime Line

Ringing Line

(default)

Description

Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off-hook.

Answers a call arriving at a Flexible CO or ICD Group button (on which the "Prime Line" is assigned) simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously.

Answers the longest ringing call at one’s telephone simply by going off-hook when multiple calls arrive.

Conditions

[Prime Line]

• The priority of the incoming call is as follows:

1) The call arriving at a button on which the "Prime Line" is assigned.

2) The call arriving at the INTERCOM button.

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

Feature Guide 67

1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1.3

Call Pickup

Description

An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension.

The following types are available:

Directed

Group

Type Picking up Call Type

A specified extension’s call.

A call within a specified call pickup group.

Call Pickup Deny:

Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible.

Conditions

Call Pickup applies to:

Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls

Internal Call Block

An extension which cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call

Block) also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions.

[Directed Call Pickup]

• A user can also pick up a specified extension’s call (except an ISDN extension’s call and broadcasting call) by pressing the corresponding DSS button. COS programming determines the extensions that can use this feature.

The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or incoming call distribution group can be programmed through system programming. Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button is red flashing.

[Group Call Pickup]

• A specified number of call pickup groups can be created (

User Groups of a Pickup

Group [650]), each of which consists of user groups. One user group can belong to several

call pickup groups. (

2.2.2 Group)

[Example]

Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

User Manual References

User Manual

1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)

68 Feature Guide

1.4 Answering Features

1.4.1.4

Hands-free Answerback

Description

A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset. If the user receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is established in the following method:

Type

Intercom Call

Trunk Call*

Answering Method

Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone.

Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension hears a beep tone.

*: Including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold.

Conditions

Hands-free Answerback applies to:

Intercom calls and trunk calls, including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method. (

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution)

Hands-free Answerback for Trunk Calls

System programming is required to use this feature.

Secret Monitor

The beep tone which the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system programming.

Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override

Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from the caller.

Hands-free Answerback with Headset

The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset.

Feature Guide References

1.5.3 Intercom Call

User Manual References

User Manual

1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)

Feature Guide 69

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5

Making Call Features

1.5.1

Predialling

Description

A display PT user can check and correct the number to be dialled on-hook. The call will be initiated after going off-hook.

Conditions

Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dialling

The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO

DIAL/STORE button. (

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System) In this case, the

extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number.

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

70 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.2

Automatic Extension Release

Description

After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the user will hear reorder tone. This operation applies to intercom calls only.

This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release.

Conditions

• A PT/PS user hears reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period, and then the PT/PS goes back to the idle status automatically. However, an SLT user will just hear reorder tone until he goes on-hook.

This feature works in one of the following cases:

When making an intercom call

a)

The first digit has not been dialled within a preprogrammed time period.

b)

After a digit is dialled, if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period.

Feature Guide 71

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.3

Intercom Call

Description

An extension user can call another extension user.

Conditions

Extension Number/Name Assignment

Extension numbers (

Extension Number [003]) and names (

Extension Name [004])

are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and name are shown on display PTs during intercom calls.

DSS Button

It is possible to access another extension with one-touch by pressing the corresponding

Direct Station Selection (DSS) button. A flexible button can be customised as a DSS button.

Call Directory—Extension Dialling

Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.

Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice

A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected.

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

A caller can change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may deny voice-calling.

Tone after Dialling

After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:

Type

Ringback Tone

Confirmation Tone

Busy Tone

DND Tone

Description

Indicates the called party is being called.

Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.

Indicates the called party is busy.

Indicates the called party has set DND.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.1 Basic Calling

1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)

1.11.2 Using the Directories

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

72 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4

Trunk Call Features

1.5.4.1

Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Description

An extension user can use the following features when making a trunk call:

Feature Description Details in

Emergency Call

A user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.

• 1.5.4.2 Emergency

Call

Account Code

Entry

A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes.

• 1.5.4.3 Account Code

Entry

Pulse to Tone

Conversion

A user can temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode to access special services.

• 1.5.4.4 Dial Type

Selection

Pause Insertion

A user can insert a preprogrammed Pause time into a dialling number by pressing the PAUSE button, or it is automatically inserted between the user-dialled code (e.g., Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access code) and the following digits.

• 1.5.4.6 Pause

Insertion

• 1.5.4.7 Host PBX

Access Code (Access

Code to the Telephone

Company from a Host

PBX)

• 1.5.4.8 Special

Carrier Access Code

Feature Guide 73

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.2

Emergency Call

Description

An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers (

Emergency Number

[304]) after seizing a trunk regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.

Conditions

• A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored (some may have default values).

• Emergency numbers may be called even when:

– in Account Code—Forced mode (

1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry)

– in any TRS/Barring levels (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))

– after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached (

1.8.2 Budget

Management)

– in Extension Lock (

1.8.3 Extension Lock)

CLIP Number Notification (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

When dialling an emergency number, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a location identification number. (

1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line

Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP))

The CLIP number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP number assigned to an ISDN port to be used. This feature is only available when using a PRI (PRI23) line, with E911 compatible services.

74 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.3

Account Code Entry

Description

An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes.

The account code is appended to the SMDR call record. Therefore, for example, the firm uses an account code for each client so that the firm can determine what calls were made for the client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client’s account code on the SMDR call record.

There are two methods of entering account codes as follows:

One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis (

Account Code Mode

[508]).

Mode

Option

Forced

Description

A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired.

A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk so as not to forget entering the code.

Conditions

• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling (e.g., One-touch Dialling).

Account Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time, while the feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk.

• Account code entry after receiving a disconnection signal from a trunk must be done while hearing reorder tone. Otherwise the SMDR call record is output and entry becomes impossible afterwards.

• If the account code is entered more than once, the code entered last is printed out in the

SMDR.

• Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code.

(

1.5.4.2 Emergency Call)

• PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a conversation.

Verified Code Entry

To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purpose, a verified code is used. This code can be used at any extension. (

1.8.6 Verified Code Entry)

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.1 Basic Calling

Feature Guide 75

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.4

Dial Type Selection

Description

The dialling mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming (

LCOT Dialling Mode [410]) regardless of originating extension (under

contract with the telephone company).

There are the following modes:

Mode

DTMF (Dual Tone

Multi-Frequency)

Pulse Dial (Rotary)

Description

The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling.

DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk.

The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling.

Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk.

Conditions

Pulse to Tone Conversion

It is possible for an extension user to temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that the user can access special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. To convert to the DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period (Default: 5 seconds) after the trunk is connected, or press . This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode.

• It is possible to select a pulse rate for the trunk port which has been set to Pulse mode (

LCOT Pulse Rate [411]). There are two pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).

• It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the trunk port which has been set to DTMF mode (

LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412]).

76 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.5

Reverse Circuit

Description

The circuit in the PBX can detect the reverse signal from the telephone company when an extension user is trying to make a trunk call. This detects the start (a called party goes offhook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing trunk call. When an trunk call is received, the circuit can also detect the reverse signal after an outside caller goes on-hook.

The duration of call can be verified on SMDR using this feature (

1.25.1 Station Message

Detail Recording (SMDR)).

It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal for outgoing trunk calls only, or for both outgoing and incoming trunk calls, or for no trunk call (disable the detection) through system programming (

LCOT Reverse Circuit [415]).

Feature Guide 77

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.6

Pause Insertion

Description

A preprogrammed Pause time (

LCOT Pause Time [416]) will be inserted manually or

automatically.

Manual Insertion: Pressing the PAUSE button.

Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted between the user-dialled codes below and the following digits.

a)

Host PBX Access code (

1.5.4.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the

Telephone Company from a Host PBX))

b)

Special Carrier Access code (

1.5.4.8 Special Carrier Access Code)

c)

Second Dial Tone Waiting code

Conditions

• The Pause time is programmable for each trunk.

• Pause can be stored in Memory Dialling.

• Pressing the PAUSE button while dialling a number inserts a pause for a preprogrammed time period.

• When a preprogrammed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, pauses are inserted a preprogrammed number of times after the code.

78 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.7

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone

Company from a Host PBX)

Description

This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension ports of the host PBX to trunk ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code assigned through system programming (

Host PBX Access Code [471]) is required to access the

telephone company from the host PBX. The Trunk Access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of this PBX basis.

A preprogrammed Pause time (

LCOT Pause Time [416]) will be automatically inserted

between the user-dialled Host PBX Access code and the following digits. (

1.5.4.6 Pause

Insertion)

[Example]

Telephone Company

Host PBX

Access Code: 0

Host PBX

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Idle Line

Access No.: 9

TRG1

PBX

Extn. 101 Extn. 102

Dials "0-01-23-4567".

Host PBX

Access Code

Telephone

No.

Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".

Idle Line

Access No.

Telephone No.

Host PBX

Access Code

Dials "9-101".

Idle Line

Access No.

Extn. No.

of the Host PBX

Note: "0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of this PBX.

Feature Guide 79

1.5 Making Call Features

Conditions

TRS/Barring

TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX. (

1.8.1 Toll

Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))

SMDR

The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code can be recorded on the SMDR when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX.

• To record on the SMDR only long distance calls (not local calls) originated via the specific trunk group, assign the long distance call code as a Host PBX Access code to the trunk group.

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

80 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.4.8

Special Carrier Access Code

Description

If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming (

Special Carrier Access Code [303]) is required

every time when a trunk call is made.

A preprogrammed Pause time (

LCOT Pause Time [416]) will be automatically inserted

between the user-dialled Special Carrier Access code and the following digits. (

1.5.4.6

Pause Insertion)

Conditions

TRS/Barring

TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier

Access code. (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))

If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX:

A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately: these codes cannot be assigned together as one code. (

1.5.4.7 Host PBX

Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))

Feature Guide 81

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.5

Seizing a Line Features

1.5.5.1

Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY

Description

An extension user can select the line seized for making calls by the following methods:

Feature Description

Line Preference—

Outgoing

A user can select the line seized when going off-hook.

Trunk Access

A user can select the Trunk Access method every time he makes a trunk call.

Details in

• 1.5.5.2 Line

Preference—

Outgoing

• 1.5.5.3 Trunk

Access

82 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.5.2

Line Preference—Outgoing

Description

A PT user can select the outgoing line he prefers to originate calls on, from the following line preferences, through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing):

Feature

Intercom

Idle Line

No Line

Prime Line

Description

When an extension user goes off-hook, an extension line is selected automatically.

When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups.

When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. He must select the desired line to make a call.

When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group.

Conditions

Line Preference Override

A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line

Access button or Memory Dialling button (e.g., One-touch Dialling) before going off-hook.

• To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a COS basis (

Trunk Group Number [500]). Also trunk groups available

for Idle Line Access should be assigned (

Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103]).

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

Feature Guide 83

1.5 Making Call Features

1.5.5.3

Trunk Access

Description

There are the following features to access a trunk.

Feature

Idle Line

Access (Local

Access)

Trunk Group

Access

S-CO Line

Access

Description Accessing method

Selects an idle trunk automatically from the assigned trunk groups.

Dial the Idle Line Access number. Or press a L-CO button.

Selects an idle trunk from the corresponding trunk group.

Dial the Trunk Group Access number and a trunk group number. Or press a

G-CO button.

Selects the desired trunk directly. Dial the S-CO Line Access number and the trunk number. Or press the S-CO button.

Conditions

• COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls (

Trunk Group

Number [500]).

• Trunk numbers can be referred on a trunk port basis (

LCOT/BRI Trunk Number

Reference [409]).

Button Assignment

A flexible button can be customised as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows:

Type

Loop-CO (L-CO)

Group-CO (G-CO)

Single-CO (S-CO)

Assignable parameter

No parameter (All assigned trunk groups through system programming are applied.)

A trunk group is assigned.

A specified trunk is assigned.

It is possible to assign trunks in the following ways:

– The same trunk to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button

– The same trunk group to more than one G-CO button

– More than one L-CO button

Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button according to the priority: S-CO

Direct Trunk Access

By pressing an idle CO button, it automatically switches on the hands-free operation mode and allows a user to use On-hook Dialling. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, or lift the handset.

Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access

An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access. If multiple trunk groups are available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming.

84 Feature Guide

1.5 Making Call Features

Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access

The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group; from lowest numbered trunk, from highest numbered trunk or rotation, can be determined through system programming.

• A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis (

LCOT/BRI

Trunk Name [401]) so that the operator or extension user can view the destination which

the caller is trying to reach before answering.

• It is possible to identify the trunk port that has a trunk connected to it (

LCOT/BRI Trunk

Connection [400]). This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk which

is not connected.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.1 Basic Calling

Feature Guide 85

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6

Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1

Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.1

Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY

Description

An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the

PBX system data. A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation.

1. Features

Feature Storing Method

One-touch Dialling

• Personal Programming

• System Programming

(PC Programming only)

KX-T7710 One-touch

Dialling (KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200 only)

System Programming

(PC Programming only)

Details in

• 1.6.1.2 Onetouch Dialling

• 1.6.1.3 KX-

T7710 One-touch

Dialling (KX-

TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

• 1.6.1.4 Last

Number Redial

• 1.6.1.5 Speed

Dialling—

Personal/System

Last Number Redial

(Outgoing Call Log)

The last dialled telephone number(s) is automatically stored.

Speed

Dialling

Personal

• Personal Programming

• Personal Operation with the Feature

Number

• System Programming

(PC Programming only)

System

System Programming

Quick Dialling

System Programming

(PC Programming only)

Hot Line

Incoming Call Log

• Personal Programming

• Personal Operation with the Feature

Number

• System Programming

(PC Programming only)

Incoming call information is automatically stored.

• 1.6.1.6 Quick

Dialling

• 1.6.1.7 Hot Line

• 1.17.2 Incoming

Call Log

86 Feature Guide

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

2. Valid Input

0–9/ /#

Input

PAUSE (Pause)

FLASH/RECALL

(Hooking)*

INTERCOM

(Secret)*

TRANSFER

(Transfer)*

Display while

Entering

0–9/ /#

P

F

[/]

T

Description

Stores the digits, and #.

Stores a pause by pressing the PAUSE button.

(

1.5.4.6 Pause Insertion)

Stores a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number. (

1.10.7 External

Feature Access (EFA))

Conceals all or part of the number by pressing the

INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed. It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on the SMDR.

Stores a transfer command by pressing the

TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number (used only for a One-touch Dialling). (

1.11.1 Call Transfer)

[Example] Storing "T + 305"= Transferring a call to extension 305.

*: Available only when in the system/personal programming mode

[Example]

When storing the number "9-123-456-7890" and concealing the telephone number "123-

456-7890",

Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM

.

Notes

• It is possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number in the beginning of the

Memory Dialling numbers.

• It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location.

Conditions

Trunk Access by Memory Dialling

A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory

Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk, the stored Trunk

Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk.

Feature Guide 87

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.2

One-touch Dialling

Description

A PT user can access a person or feature by one-touch. This is activated by storing the number

(e.g., extension number, telephone number, or feature number) in a One-touch Dialling button.

Conditions

One-touch Dialling Button

A flexible button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button.

Full One-touch Dialling

There is no need to go off-hook before pressing the One-touch Dialling button.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

88 Feature Guide

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.3

KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Description

The Message button and One-touch buttons on all KX-T7710 telephones connected to the

PBX can be customised at once through system programming. The same extension number, telephone number, or feature number will be assigned to the same buttons on each KX-T7710, useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications.

[Programming Example]

Button

MESSAGE

Desired Number

702 (Message Waiting [To Call Back])

One-touch Dial 01 100 (Front Desk)

One-touch Dial 02

7601 (Wake-up Call)

One-touch Dial 03 102 (Restaurant)

: :

The MESSAGE button is programmed by default to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication, however, the MESSAGE button can be programmed to perform other features. The eight One-touch buttons have no default setting.

Conditions

• The KX-T7710 has two modes, NORMAL mode and PBX mode, selected by a switch on the telephone. This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in the PBX mode.

• This feature is available while hearing a dial tone.

• Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

Feature Guide 89

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.4

Last Number Redial

Description

Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled to allow the same number to be dialled again.

Automatic Redial:

If Last Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, redialling will be automatically retried a preprogrammed number of times (

Automatic Redial Repeat

Times [205]) at preprogrammed intervals ( Automatic Redial Interval [206]). The Redial Call

No-answer Ring Duration time is programmable.

This feature is available only on certain PT models which have the SP-PHONE button.

Outgoing Call Log:

The last five dialled numbers are automatically stored at each extension. A display PT user can redial easily any of the stored numbers.

Conditions

• The memorised telephone number is replaced by a new one.

• If any dialling operation is done or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial,

Automatic Redial is cancelled.

• Automatic Redial is not available for some countries/areas when using an analogue trunk.

Interrupt Redial

When the called party or the seized trunk is busy, it is possible to press the REDIAL button continuously until the called party or the trunk becomes idle. There is no need to go offhook, before pressing the REDIAL button.

Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button

Pressing the REDIAL button on a display DPT while on-hook can display the Outgoing Call

Log. System programming is required for this operation.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.3 Redial

1.11.1 Using the Call Log

90 Feature Guide

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.5

Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Description

An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data, or the PBX system data (

System Speed Dialling

Number [001]).

Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.

Conditions

[General]

• Any number (e.g., telephone number, feature number) can be stored in a speed dialling number. A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number through personal programming, and System Speed Dialling number (

System Speed Dialling

Name [002]).

Call Directory—Speed Dialling

Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.

[Personal Speed Dialling]

Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock

An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent other users from viewing the number. In this case, the Incoming and Outgoing Call Log information displays are also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))

[System Speed Dialling]

TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling

It is possible to override the TRS/Barring using the System Speed Dialling (

TRS/

Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509]). (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call

Barring (Barring))

System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button

Pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button on a display DPT while on-hook can display the

System Speed Dialling Directory.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

1.11.1 Using the Call Log

1.11.2 Using the Directories

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

3.3 Customising Your System (System Programming)

Feature Guide 91

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.6

Quick Dialling

Description

An extension user can access a person or feature easily. This is enabled by storing the number

(e.g., extension number, telephone number or feature number) for Quick Dialling.

Conditions

• Quick Dialling is convenient in the following cases:

– Room service calls in a hotel

– Calling another branch via the public network. The extension user needs to dial only the extension number of another branch.

• Quick Dialling numbers follow the flexible numbering plan.

(

2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering)

• The storing example is as follows:

Location No.

Quick Dialling No.

Quick Dialling 01 110

Desired Number

9110 (Trunk Call)

:

Quick Dialling 02 5

Quick Dialling 03 2011

: :

3016 (Room Service)

90123456789 (Another Branch)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

92 Feature Guide

1.6 Memory Dialling Features

1.6.1.7

Hot Line

Description

An extension user can make an outgoing call by only going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number or the extension number.

If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone is generated for a specified

Waiting time assigned through system programming (

Hot Line Waiting Time [204]) and then

dialling starts. During the Waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature.

This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.

Conditions

Capable Telephone

PT, SLT, T1-OPX, and PS

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.2 Easy Dialling

Feature Guide 93

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7

Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.1

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Description

If the line is busy when a call is made, callback ringing will inform the caller when the line becomes free using this feature. After the extension answers the callback ringing, the dialled number is automatically redialled.

Conditions

• If the callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds, the callback is cancelled.

• If the extension hears a busy tone before dialling the telephone number, only the trunk or trunk group is reserved. After answering the callback ringing, the extension should dial the telephone number.

• An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy. The last setting is effective.

• Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously.

However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension.

• The priority of the callback is the setting order.

• This feature cannot be used for calls to a VPS or an ISDN extension.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

94 Feature Guide

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.2

Executive Busy Override

Description

Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Executive Busy Override Deny:

It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user.

Conditions

• COS programming determines extension users who can use the Executive Busy Override

(

Executive Busy Override [505]) and set the Executive Busy Override Deny mode (

Executive Busy Override Deny [506]).

• This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions:

a)

Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security (

1.10.5 Data Line Security)

has been set.

b)

While being monitored by another extension (

1.7.3 Call Monitor).

c)

While receiving OHCA (

1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper

OHCA (

1.7.4.4 Whisper OHCA).

d)

During a Conference call (

1.13.1 Conference Features).

e)

During a doorphone call (

1.16.1 Doorphone Call).

f)

While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (

1.23.3 Voice Mail

DPT (Digital) Integration).

g)

During Consultation Hold.

(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)

• This feature is not available for a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

1.7.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override

Deny)

Feature Guide 95

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.3

Call Monitor

Description

Allows an extension user to listen to the busy extension user’s existing conversation. The user can hear the conversation, but the user’s voice is not heard. If desired, interrupting the call to establish a three-party conference call is available.

Conditions

• COS programming determines extension users who can use this feature.

• This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside party.

• This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions:

a)

Executive Busy Override Deny (

1.7.2 Executive Busy Override) or Data Line

Security (

1.10.5 Data Line Security) has been set.

b)

While receiving OHCA (

1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper

OHCA (

1.7.4.4 Whisper OHCA).

c)

During a Conference call (

1.13.1 Conference Features).

d)

During a doorphone call (

1.16.1 Doorphone Call).

e)

While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (

1.23.3 Voice Mail

DPT (Digital) Integration).

f)

During Consultation Hold.

(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)

• This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation (

1.19.1 Fixed Buttons and 1.19.2 Flexible Buttons):

– FLASH/RECALL button

– HOLD button

– TRANSFER button

– CONF (Conference) button

– DSS button

– EFA button

– Two-way Record button

– Two-way Transfer button

– One-touch Two-way Transfer button

– Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

96 Feature Guide

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.4

Second Call Notification to Busy Extension

1.7.4.1

Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY

Description

When attempting to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), an extension user can send call waiting indication to the busy extension (Call Waiting). The notification receiving method depends on the called extension’s personal setting and the telephone type:

Notification

Receiving Method

Call Waiting Tone

Off-hook Call

Announcement

(OHCA)

Whisper OHCA

Description Details in

Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy extension.

• 1.7.4.2 Call

Waiting Tone

Talk with the busy extension using the built-in speaker and microphone of the called extension while the existing call is made using the handset.

• 1.7.4.3 Offhook Call

Announcement

(OHCA)

Give a message to the busy extension through the handset.

• 1.7.4.4

Whisper OHCA

Conditions

• Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone, OHCA, Whisper OHCA, or none of these.

• OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension.

• OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types. In such cases, the Call

Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension.

Calling

Extension’s

OHCA COS

Mode

Disable

Called Extension’s Call Waiting Mode

OFF

Cancel

Call Waiting disabled

Call Waiting Tone

Call Waiting tone

ON

OHCA

Call Waiting tone

Whisper OHCA

Call Waiting tone

Enable Call Waiting disabled

Call Waiting tone OHCA

(or Call Waiting tone)

Whisper OHCA

(or Call Waiting tone)

• The notification receiving methods (Call Waiting tone, OHCA, and Whisper OHCA) are available when the called extension is having a conversation with other party. If not, the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available to receive the notification. Even while waiting, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.

• If none of these notification receiving methods, Call Waiting tone, OHCA, or Whisper

OHCA is set at the called party, the caller will hear reorder tone.

Feature Guide 97

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

98 Feature Guide

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.4.2

Call Waiting Tone

Description

When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting.

Conditions

• This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.

• Call Waiting tone can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call

Waiting Tone Type Selection).

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

Feature Guide 99

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.4.3

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Description

An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built-in speaker and microphone of the called party’s PT. If the existing call is using a handset, a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties.

Conditions

• COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature.

• This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones:

– KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636

– KX-T7536

– KX-T7436

– KX-T7235 (except KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE)

• If the KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE are connected to the PBX, the OHCA feature for the

KX-T7235 should be disabled through system programming.

• The OHCA feature cannot be used in the following cases:

(a) COS or called extension's telephone type is not available for this feature.

(b) The called extension (DPT) is connected to a PC (PC Console or PC Phone) via the USB Module.

(c) The called extension (DPT) is in the Digital XDP connection.

The Call Waiting tone is sent to the called extension. (

1.7.4.2 Call Waiting Tone)

• While an extension is receiving OHCA, if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call, OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone.

• While an extension is receiving OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.

100 Feature Guide

1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

1.7.4.4

Whisper OHCA

Description

An extension user can give a message to a busy extension through the handset.

Conditions

• COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature.

• This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones:

– KX-T7600 series

– KX-T7500 series

– KX-T7400 series (except KX-T7451)

• If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type, the Call

Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension. (

1.7.4.2 Call Waiting Tone)

• If the called extension does not use a KX-T7600, KX-T7500, or KX-T7400 series telephone but forces Whisper OHCA, the announcement may be heard by the other party.

• It is possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone. However, it may not work properly. (e.g., The voice may be heard by the other party.)

• While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call, the Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone.

• While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.

Feature Guide 101

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

1.8

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Features

1.8.1

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Description

TRS/Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming. It is applied when the user goes off-hook, a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk.

Each COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night).

There are seven levels available. Level 1 is the highest level and the level 7 is the lowest. That is, level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls. Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables.

Denied Code Tables

An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables. If the leading digits of the dialled number (not including the Trunk Access number) are not found in the table, the call is made. There are five

Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.

Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited. These numbers are defined as denied codes.

Exception Code Tables

These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the applicable

Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made.

There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.

Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes. These numbers are defined as exception codes.

TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling

If the call is made using System Speed Dialling, the call can override the TRS/Barring. Each

COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for System Speed Dialling (

TRS/Barring

Override by System Speed Dialling [300]).

Once this feature is set, it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling. Any extension which sets Extension Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling.

102 Feature Guide

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

TRS/Barring Level

TRS/Barring level is determined by the applicable levels of Denied Code Tables and Exception

Code Tables.

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Denied Code Tables

*1

Not Programmable

Table for Level 2

Tables for Levels 2 and 3

Exception Code Tables

*2

Not Programmable

Tables for Levels 2 through 6

Tables for Levels 3 through 6

Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6

Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6

Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Tables for Level 6

Not Programmable Not Programmable

*1

:

*2

:

TRS/Barring Denied Code [301]

TRS/Barring Exception Code [302]

Explanation:

Level 1: Allows all calls.

Level 2: Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6.

Level 3: Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.

Level 7: Allows intercom calls only.

[Programming Example]

COS No.

1

2

:

Day

1

2

:

Level for Time Mode

*1

Lunch Break

1

2

:

1

2

:

Night

6

6

:

Level for System

Speed Dialling

1

1

:

*2

*1

*2

:

:

TRS/Barring Level [501]

TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509]

Feature Guide 103

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

[Flowchart]

An extension user makes

a trunk call.

Is the call made by System

Speed Dialling ?

No

No

Checks the

TRS/Barring level for the time mode of the extension's COS.

Yes

Is TRS/Barring Override by

System Speed Dialling enabled?

Yes

Checks the TRS/Barring level for System Speed

Dialling of the extension's COS.

Level 7

Level 1

What is the TRS/Barring level?

Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables?

Yes

No

Yes

Is the dialled number found in applicable Exception Code Tables?

No

The call is denied.

The user hears reorder tone.

The call is made.

104 Feature Guide

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

Conditions

WARNING

The software contained in the TRS/Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.

Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes.

KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.

• A COS should be assigned for each extension. (

Class of Service [602])

• TRS/Barring checks are applied to the following:

– ARS

– Trunk Access (Idle Line/Trunk Group/S-CO Line)

• It is programmable whether " " or "#" is checked by the TRS/Barring. This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges.

• It is programmable whether TRS/Barring checks the digits dialled after the External

Feature Access during a trunk call. (

1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))

Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code

TRS/Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code (

1.5.4.7 Host

PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or a

Special Carrier Access code (

1.5.4.8 Special Carrier Access Code) in the following

cases:

Type

Host PBX

Access Code

Stored

Found Not found

Deletes the code. A

TRS/Barring check is carried out on the following digits.

The call is made

(excepted from TRS/

Barring).

Special Carrier

Access Code

Deletes the code. A

TRS/Barring check is carried out on the following digits.

TRS/Barring checks the whole number.

Not stored

TRS/Barring checks the whole number.

TRS/Barring checks the whole number.

ARS

If ARS is applied to a dialled number, TRS/Barring will check the user-dialled number (not the modified number by ARS). In this case, a Host PBX Access code and/or a Special

Carrier Access code will not be checked.

Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation

The dialling of digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the preprogrammed limitation, the line will be disconnected.

• A TRS/Barring level can be changed by some features. The priority of features, when multiple features are used, is as follows:

1) Dial Tone Transfer (

1.8.4 Dial Tone Transfer)

2) Budget Management (

1.8.2 Budget Management)

3) TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling

Feature Guide 105

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

4) Walking COS/Verified Code Entry

(

1.8.5 Walking COS, 1.8.6 Verified Code Entry)

5) Extension Lock

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

1.8.3 Extension Lock

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2.2.4 Time Service

106 Feature Guide

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

1.8.2

Budget Management

Description

Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on an extension basis. If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit, an extension user cannot make further trunk calls. An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge.

Conditions

• If the limit is reached, TRS/Barring Level 7 is applied. (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call

Barring (Barring))

Budget Management for Verified Call

If an extension user make a trunk call with a verified code, the call charge will be counted on the verified code (not the extension). (

1.8.6 Verified Code Entry) The limit of the call

charge can be assigned on each verified code.

• The pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) service is required for this feature.

• It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line after an alarm tone or only to send an alarm tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a conversation.

User Manual References

User Manual

3.2.2 Manager Programming

Feature Guide 107

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

1.8.3

Extension Lock

Description

An extension user can change the TRS/Barring level of the telephone (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction

(TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls. An

extension personal identification number (PIN) is used to unlock the telephone (

1.26.1

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)).

This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.

Conditions

• This feature also restricts changing the FWD destination. (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding

(FWD))

Remote Extension Lock

Overrides Extension Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote

Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. If a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user, the extension will be unlocked.

This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.

TRS/Barring Level

COS programming determines the TRS/Barring level for Extension Lock (

TRS/Barring

Level for Extension Lock [510]).

User Manual References

User Manual

1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock)

2.1.1 Extension Control

108 Feature Guide

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

1.8.4

Dial Tone Transfer

Description

An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS/Barring level (

1.8.1 Toll

Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) for the extension user temporarily. After that, the

extension user can make his call.

[Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing call

(e.g., international calls).

(3) Make a trunk call

(2) Change

TRS/Barring level

Guest Room

(Trunk call restricted)

(1) Call

Manager

Toll Restriction/

Call Barring button

Conditions

• The changed level effects just one time.

Toll Restriction/Call Barring Button

A manager extension must store the desired TRS/Barring level in the Toll Restriction/Call

Barring button. A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)

Feature Guide 109

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

1.8.5

Walking COS

Description

An extension user can use another extension telephone with the COS assigned on his own extension temporarily. The extension accesses his own extension from another telephone and operates features with the same conditions which are assigned his own extension. It is one of the remote operations. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature (

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)).

Conditions

• The following items are applied:

– COS programming

– Budget Management (

1.8.2 Budget Management)

– Itemised Billing code for ARS (

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))

– Extension number recorded on the SMDR (

1.25.1 Station Message Detail

Recording (SMDR)).

Walking COS through DISA

This feature is also available through the DISA. (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access

(DISA))

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions

110 Feature Guide

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

1.8.6

Verified Code Entry

Description

An extension user can make a trunk call with a verified code from his own or any other extension to change the TRS/Barring level (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring

(Barring)) or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A verified code personal

identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature.

Conditions

WARNING

When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)

Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.

b)

Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.

c)

Change the PIN frequently.

• The following items are applied:

– COS programming

– Budget Management

– Itemised Billing code for ARS

– The + verified code recorded on the SMDR instead of the extension number

(

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).

Verified Code Entry through DISA

This feature is also available through the DISA. (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access

(DISA))

Verified Code PIN

A verified code PIN must be assigned for each verified code through system programming

(

Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122]) or through manager

programming.

Verified Code PIN Lock

If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN against the verified code will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it.

In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.

Feature Guide 111

1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features

Budget Management for Verified Calls

A limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code.

[Example of Verified Codes and Their Programming]

Location

No.

0001

0002

:

Verified

Code

*1

User

Name

*2

Verified

Code PIN

1111 Tom Smith 1234

2222 John White 9876543210

: : :

COS

No.

*3

1

3

:

Itemised

Billing Code for ARS

Budget

Management

2323 5000Yen

4545

:

3000Yen

:

*1

:

*2

:

*3

:

Verified Code [120]

Verified Code Name [121]

Verified Code COS Number [123]

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Budget Management

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

2.2.6 Manager Features

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions

3.2.2 Manager Programming

112 Feature Guide

1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

1.9

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

1.9.1

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Description

ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogrammed settings. The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier.

[Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart]

The numbers X in the flowchart correspond to the [Programming Procedures] on the following pages.

A trunk call is made.

No (Normal Trunk Access)

Sends the telephone number to the userselected carrier.

Yes

Yes

Is the dialled number found in the

No

Is the dialled number found in the

Yes to determine which carrier to use.

No

No

Yes

Is there an available

Yes

Modifies the dialled number by

Sends the modified number to the trunk.

No

Because all trunks are busy?

Yes

Sends a busy tone.

No

Is normal

Trunk Access allowed?

No

Sends a reorder tone.

Yes

(default)

Sends the telephone number by the Idle Line

Access.

Feature Guide 113

1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

[Programming Procedures]

1.

ARS Mode Assignment (

ARS Mode [320])

It is possible to select whether ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method or when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk

Access method. (

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access)

2.

Leading Number Exception Table Assignment

Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature.

2

ARS Leading Number Exception Table

Location

No.

001

002

:

033555

06456

:

Leading No.

Exception

*1

*1

:

ARS Exception Number [325]

3.

Leading Number Table Assignment

Store the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading number that will be routed by

Assignment") is selected for each number.

The additional (remain) number of digits must be assigned only when "#", for example, is needed after a dialled number. The "#" is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number (excluding a leading number).

3

ARS Leading Number Table

Location

No.

Leading

No.

*1

0001

0002

039

03

0003

:

0444

:

Additional (Remain)

No. of Digits

Routing Plan

Table No.

*2

7

0

5

:

1

4

5

:

*1

:

*2 :

ARS Leading Number [321]

ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322]

If a dialled number matches a leading number, the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional (remain) number of digits are dialled.

If a dialled number matches multiple leading number entries, the leading number entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority.

114 Feature Guide

1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

[Example]

Dialled

Number

039-123-4567

Corresponding

Routing Plan Table No.

1

Description

"039" is found in location 0001 and seven digits (assigned additional [remain] number of digits in location 0001) were dialled. The

Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit.

039-654-321 1

038 4

"039" is found in location 0001 and the

Inter-digit time expired before the seventh digit is received. The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the Inter-digit time expired.

"03" is found in two locations (locations

0001 and 0002), so the PBX waits for the next digit "8". "038" is not found in any location, then "03" (location 0002) is selected. The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected.

4.

Routing Plan Table Assignment

Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority.

Time Table

5

As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day, four time blocks

(Time-A through D) can be programmed for each day of the week.

Carrier Priority

6 in each time block. The carrier is selected in the entry order (the order in which entries are listed).

3

ARS Leading Number Table

Location Leading

No.

No.

Additional

(Remain)

No. of Digits

Routing Plan

Table No.

0001

:

03

:

8

:

1

:

4

ARS Routing Plan Table

Routing Plan Table

1

5

SUN

Time Table*

1

Time-A

Time-B

9:00

12:00

6 Carrier*

2

Priority 1 Priority 2

1 (A telecom)

1 (A telecom)

4 (D telecom)

2 (B telecom)

:

SAT

Time-C

Time-D

:

Time-A

Time-B

Time-C

Time-D

15:00

21:00

:

9:00

1 (A telecom) 2 (B telecom)

: :

3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom)

12:00

15:00

21:00

3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom)

3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom)

3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom)

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

*1

:

*2

:

ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330]

ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346]

Feature Guide 115

1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

5.

Carrier Table Assignment

A specified number of carriers can be programmed. Assign the following items for each

Carrier Table: of the user-dialled number.

116 Feature Guide carrier.

[Command Explanation]

Command

Number Add the number.

C

P

Description

Add the Carrier Access code.

Analogue Line: Insert a pause.

ISDN/T1/E1 Line: Insert a pause and change to tone (DTMF) signal.

A

G

I

H Add the dialled number after the digits are removed (Home position).

[Programming Example]

7

Carrier Table

8

9

Carrier Name

*1

Removed Number of Digits

*2

10

Carrier Access Code

*3

11

Trunk Group

*4

12

Modify Command

1

A telecom

6

0077

1, 2, 3

CH#12

2

B telecom

0

0088

1, 2

CH

[Example]

Dialled number: 0123456789

(Trunk Access no. is ignored.)

Modification:

12

012345 6789 0077 6789 #12

H

9

Remove 6 digits.

#12 Add the number.

C

Add the Carrier Access

*1

:

*2

:

ARS Carrier Name [350]

ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352]

1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

*3

:

*4

:

ARS Carrier Access Code [353]

ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351]

6.

Optional Assignment

An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant.

Authorisation Code for a Trunk Group 14

An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier.

Itemised Billing Code

15

An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension and for each verified code.

If a call is not made from an extension (e.g., DISA or TIE) and no verified code is used, the

Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verified code will be used.

Conditions

WARNING

The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.

Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes.

KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.

The Dialled Number on the SMDR

It is possible to choose to print either the user-dialled number or the modified number on the SMDR through system programming. (

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording

(SMDR))

ARS Data Download/Upload

It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming:

2

3

4

ARS Leading Number Exception Table

ARS Leading Number Table

ARS Routing Plan Table

This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge, and the updated data can be used for multiple customers.

• A TRS/Barring check is done before ARS is applied. (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call

Barring (Barring))

Feature Guide 117

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.1 Hands-free Operation

Description

A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons (e.g.,

REDIAL) automatically activate hands-free mode.

Conditions

PTs with the MONITOR Button

PTs with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands-free mode and cannot be used for hands-free conversations.

118 Feature Guide

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.2 Off-hook Monitor

Description

A PT user can let others listen to the user’s conversation through the built-in speaker, during a conversation using the handset.

Conditions

Capable Telephone

KX-T7400 series and KX-T7500 series (display PT only), and all KX-T7600 series telephones

To enable this feature, system programming is required. If disabled, hands-free conversation is performed instead.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor)

Feature Guide 119

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.3 Mute

Description

During a conversation, a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker or the handset receiver. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Mute. Only your voice will be muted.

Conditions

• This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.6 Mute

120 Feature Guide

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.4 Headset Operation

Description

This PBX provides headset compatible PTs. A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset.

For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.

This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.

Conditions

• A headset is an option.

• If the headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker.

• To set the headset mode on a DPT, use personal programming (Headset Operation) or press the Headset button. To set headset mode on an APT, use the handset/headset selector provided on the set and/or on the headset.

Headset Button

A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as the Headset button. The Headset button can be also assigned to a flexible button on an APT, but the button does not work.

Answer/Release Button

A flexible button can be customised as an Answer button or a Release button. Such buttons are useful for headset operation. It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing an Answer button. While hearing the Call Waiting tone during a conversation, pressing an Answer button enables one to answer the second call by placing the current call on hold. Pressing a Release button enables one to disconnect the line during or after conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.

• It is possible to switch the headset mode to the hands-free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button.

• Headset users cannot use the following features:

– Automatic Redial (

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial)

– Receiving OHCA (

1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA))

– Receiving Whisper OHCA (

1.7.4.4 Whisper OHCA)

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button

1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

Feature Guide 121

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.5 Data Line Security

Description

Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy

Override. Extension which has data devices connected (e.g., fax machine) may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)

122 Feature Guide

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Description

The FLASH/RECALL button (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode) or Terminate button

(Terminate mode) is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first. It performs as going on-hook and then going off-hook.

[Explanation of Each Mode]

Flash/Recall Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last. For example, if a trunk call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone company.

Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference—Outgoing setting. (

1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing)

Conditions

FLASH/RECALL Button Mode

One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming:

– Flash/Recall mode

– Terminate mode

– External Feature Access (EFA) mode. (

1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))

Terminate Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button.

Disconnect Time (Only for Flash/Recall Mode)

The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk port (

LCOT Disconnect Time [418]).

• This feature outputs an SMDR call record (

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording

(SMDR)), restarts the call timer, inserts the automatic pause, and checks the TRS/Barring

level (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) again.

• If the ARS mode is on (

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) or if a trunk call is

established through the INTERCOM button or ICD Group button, the Terminate mode will be always effective even though the Flash/Recall mode has been set.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

Feature Guide 123

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Description

An extension user can have access to the features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Transfer, Hold, Call Waiting, etc. A flash/recall signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This is only available on trunk calls (including Host PBX Access [

1.5.4.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)]).

Conditions

Flash/Recall Time

The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each trunk port (

LCOT Flash/Recall Time

[417]).

EFA Button

A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button.

• Pressing the FLASH/RECALL button which is set to EFA mode (

1.10.6 Flash/Recall/

Terminate) or the EFA button performs this feature. It is also possible to perform this

feature by entering the feature number when the current call is placed on a Consultation

Hold.

(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.9.2 If a Host PBX is Connected

124 Feature Guide

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Description

Trunk calls are limited by the following features:

Extension-to-Trunk Call

Duration

Feature Description

If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group (

Extension-to-Trunk Call

Duration [472]). Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds

before the time-limit at five second intervals. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected.

COS programming determines to enable or disable this feature

(

Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502]). Whether this feature is

applied to outgoing calls only or all calls is also programmable.

Trunk-to-Trunk Call

(except Unattended

Conference Call)

Duration

If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group (

Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473]). Both parties

will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time-limit at five second intervals. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected.

The timer is applied for a trunk call which is made via the PBX.

If both call is made by the extension (e.g., a trunk call made by an extension is transferred to an outside party), the shorter limit will apply to the call.

Budget Management

When the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached, an extension user will start to hear an alarm tone three times at five second intervals and the user cannot make further trunk calls.

Whether the line is disconnected after the alarm tone is programmable. (

1.8.2 Budget Management)

Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation

While engaged on a received trunk call, the dialling of digits can be restricted. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation, the line will be disconnected.

Conditions

• During an Unattended Conference Call, the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied. (

1.13.1.2 Conference)

Feature Guide 125

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

Description

Multiple telephones can be connected to the same port. This is useful to increase the number of telephones without additional extension cards. The combinations and features of the parallelled telephones are described below.

Features Descriptions

Parallel

Mode

Parallel connection allows the connection of an

SLT to an APT or a DPT that is connected to a

Super Hybrid port.

When parallel mode is enabled, the two telephones function as follows:

• Both share one extension number

(main telephone’s extension number).

• Either telephone can make or answer a call.

• If one goes off-hook while the other is on a call, the call is switched to the former.

EXtra Device

Port (XDP)

Mode

XDP mode can be used when the main telephone in a parallel connection is a DPT connected to a Super Hybrid port.

Unlike parallel mode, each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number. (

2.1.1 Extension Port

Configuration)

Connections

PBX

APT/DPT + SLT

DPT

SLT

Extn. 101 Extn. 101

APT SLT

Extn. 102 Extn. 102

PBX

DPT + SLT

DPT

SLT

Extn. 101 Extn. 105

Digital XDP The Digital XDP allows two DPTs to be connected together when one of them is connected to the following port:

Deleted: the

• a DPT or Super Hybrid port (with the

KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)

• a Super Hybrid port (with the KX-

TDA15)

The DPT that is connected directly to the PBX is called the "master DPT", and the DPT connected to the master is the "slave DPT".

Like XDP mode, each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number.

In addition to a slave DPT, the master DPT

(connected to a Super Hybrid port) can have an

SLT in parallel or XDP mode.

PBX

DPT + DPT

Master

Slave

DPT DPT

Extn. 101 Extn. 201

PBX

DPT + DPT + SLT

Master

Slave

DPT DPT

Extn. 101 Extn. 201

SLT

Extn. 101 (in Parallel Mode)

or

Extn. 105 (in XDP Mode)

126 Feature Guide

1.10 Conversation Features

Features Descriptions

Wireless

XDP Parallel

Mode

For this connection, refer to the Wireless XDP

Parallel mode feature. (

1.24.5 Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode)

Connections

APT/DPT/SLT + PS

PBX

PT

Extn. 101

PS

Extn. 101

SLT

Extn. 102

PS

Extn. 102

Conditions

[APT + SLT]

• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, a three-party call is established.

If one user goes on-hook, the other user continues the call.

• An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is:

– playing background music (BGM)

– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.

• The SLT will always ring for incoming calls (if its ringer is turned on). It cannot be programmed to not ring.

[DPT + SLT]

• When in the parallel mode, the XDP mode of the Super Hybrid port should be off through system programming.

• Whether the SLT rings for incoming calls is programmable.

Ring on: Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands-free Answerback mode

(

1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback) or voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving Ring/

Voice) (

1.5.3 Intercom Call).

Ring off: Only the PT rings. However, the SLT can answer the call.

• If one goes off-hook while the other is on a call, the call is switched to the former. However, the call will not be switched in one of the following conditions:

a)

While being monitored by another extension. (

1.5.3 Intercom Call)

b)

While receiving OHCA (

1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper

OHCA. (

1.7.4.4 Whisper OHCA)

c)

During a Conference call (

1.13.1 Conference Features).

d)

While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (

1.23.3 Voice Mail

DPT (Digital) Integration).

Feature Guide 127

1.10 Conversation Features

[DPT + DPT]

Available Telephones

KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7640)

KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only

Digital XDP connection enables the maximum number of DPTs that the PBX supports to be increased. This increase is only available when (1) the MEC card is installed and (2) a high-capacity power supply unit (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) is installed or an additional AC adaptor (with the KX-TDA30) is connected.

KX-TDA15 only

Digital XDP connection is available only for a DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port.

• When using Digital XDP connection, the following features cannot be used with the DPTs:

a)

OHCA: A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set.

b)

USB Module: The DPTs will not work correctly if a USB Module is connected. Do not connect USB Modules to the DPTs.

Note

Even if the slave DPT is disconnected, the OHCA feature and USB Module still cannot be used with the master DPT. To use them, the DPT must be disconnected from the PBX, and then reconnected.

[DPT + DPT + SLT]

• When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode, the SLT works as the parallel extension of the master DPT.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.3.2 MEC Card

2.7.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

2.7.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.6 MEC Card

6.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

6.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone)

128 Feature Guide

1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Description

The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from the analogue trunk when the other party is hung up. To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks, the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with reorder tone.

Conditions

• CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls (

LCOT CPC Signal

Detection Time—Incoming [414]), and for outgoing trunk calls ( LCOT CPC Signal

Detection Time—Outgoing [413]).

• If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable

CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls.

• If CPC signal is detected during a Conference call (

1.13.1.2 Conference), the line is

disconnected. The remaining parties stay connected.

• If CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature (

1.16.6

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the line is

disconnected.

Feature Guide 129

1.11 Transferring Features

1.11 Transferring Features

1.11.1 Call Transfer

Description

An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are available:

Feature

With

Announcement

Without

Announcement

Transferring method

Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party.

Transfer is completed without an announcement.

After dialling the destination, while hearing a ringback tone, the originator can replace the handset.

Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.

Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.

Conditions

• If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred. (

1.12.4 Music on Hold) It is programmable whether a ringback tone or

music is sent (

Music for Transfer [712]).

• If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the outside party. (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))

• COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party (

Call Transfer to Trunk [503]). COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension

of another PBX via the TIE line service using the PBX Code method (Access with PBX

Code) (

1.28.1 TIE Line Service).

Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement

If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time

(

Transfer Recall Time [201]), the call will be redirected to the Transfer Recall destination

assigned to the extension which transferred the call. If the destination is not assigned, the call will return to the extension.

[Available destination]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-

OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

Availability

130 Feature Guide

1.11 Transferring Features

Destination

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

Availability

One-touch Transfer

The DSS Console and the PT user can hold a call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly. A One-touch Dialling button can also be used if the

TRANSFER command is stored with a number (

1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features).

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)

Feature Guide 131

1.12 Holding Features

1.12 Holding Features

1.12.1 Call Hold

Description

An extension user can put a call on hold. The following features are available depending on the result.

Feature

Call Hold General

Exclusive Call Hold

Description

Any extension can retrieve a held call.

Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it.

The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and

Exclusive Call Hold.

Conditions

• A PT user can hold an intercom call and multiple trunk calls simultaneously. An SLT user can hold either an intercom call or a trunk call. To hold multiple intercom calls on a PT simultaneously, use the Call Park feature (

1.12.2 Call Park). Call Park feature can also

be used to hold multiple intercom calls and/or trunk calls simultaneously on an SLT.

Music on Hold

Music, if available, is sent to the held party. (

1.12.4 Music on Hold)

Hold Recall

If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (

Hold Recall Time

[200]), Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold. If the extension is

engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.

• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the call is automatically disconnected. This timer starts when Hold Recall activates.

Automatic Call Hold

A PT user can be programmed holding of the current call when pressing another CO/ICD

Group/INTERCOM button, through system programming. If this feature is not enabled, the current call will be disconnected.

[Example]

It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button, this puts the current intercom call (on the INTERCOM button) on hold. To return to the held call, press the INTERCOM button.

Call Hold Retrieve Deny

If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call

Block), he cannot retrieve the held call which the extensions made.

SLT Hold Mode

It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods through system programming:

132 Feature Guide

1.12 Holding Features

Mode 1

Hold Transfer to Trunk Transfer to Extension

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Trunk Access No.

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Extension No.

Mode 2

(Default)

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Hold Feature No.

+

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Trunk Access No.

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Extension No.

Mode 3

Mode 4

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Hold Feature No.

+

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Hold Feature No.

+

Trunk Access No.

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Extension No.

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Hold Feature No.

+

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Hold Feature No.

+

Trunk Access No.

Flashing the hookswitch

+

Hold Feature No.

+

Extension No.

If the following occurs frequently with an SLT, choose "

Mode 2

", "

Mode 3

", or "

Mode 4

":

a)

When an SLT user receives a call, reorder tone is heard or nobody answers the call.

b)

When an SLT user goes off-hook, reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone.

If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, choose "

Mode 2

", "

Mode 3

", or "

Mode 4

". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and

Mode 4.

• Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default. (

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.2 Holding a Call

Feature Guide 133

1.12 Holding Features

1.12.2 Call Park

Description

An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX. The Call Park feature can be used as a transferring feature; this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user.

Conditions

Automatic Call Park

It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically.

Retry

If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park, the originator will hear a busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing the busy tone by selecting parking zone or a vacant zone.

Call Park Recall

If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, Call Park Recall will be heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.

• If a parked trunk call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is automatically disconnected.

Call Park Button

Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone.

A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset parking zone as follows:

Light pattern

Slow red flashing

Off

Status

Parked in the preset parking zone

No parked call

Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Button

Pressing the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically. A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.

Call Park Retrieve Deny

If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call

Block), he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.2 Holding a Call

134 Feature Guide

1.12 Holding Features

1.12.3 Call Splitting

Description

An extension user can alternate between two other parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party.

Conditions

• While having a conversation with one party, the other party is in Consultation Hold.

(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)

Feature Guide 135

1.12 Holding Features

1.12.4 Music on Hold

Description

Music can be played to any party on hold. The following music sources are available:

a)

Internal music source

b)

External music source

c)

Cyclic tone

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

BGM number (1 or 2) or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold (

Music on Hold

[711]).

BGM numbers are the same as the external music port numbers (e.g., External music port 1 is BGM1.) However BGM2 includes internal music sources 1 and 2 as well as external music port 2. It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM2 (

Music Source

Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)

[710]).

[BGM Number and the Music Source]

BGM No.

1

Music Source

External music port 1

2

External music port 2/Internal music source 1 or 2

[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]

BGM or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold (

Music on Hold [711]).

BGM includes internal music sources 1, 2 and external music port. It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM (

Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/

KX-TDA30)/BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) [710]).

Conditions

Hardware Requirement: User-supplied music source

Volume Control

It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external music source.

• It is possible to choose a different music source for each tenant. (

2.2.3 Tenant Service)

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

136 Feature Guide

1.13 Conference Features

1.13 Conference Features

1.13.1 Conference Features

1.13.1.1 Conference Features—SUMMARY

Description

A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously. The following features are available to establish a conference call:

Feature

Conference

Executive Busy

Override

Description Details in

During a two-party conversation, an extension user can add other parties to establish a conference call with up to eight parties.

• 1.13.1.2

Conference

An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

• 1.7.2

Executive

Busy

Override

Privacy Release

During a conversation with an outside party on the S-

CO button, a PT/PS user can allow another extension to join the conversation.

• 1.13.1.3

Privacy

Release

Conditions

• One PBX supports a maximum of 32 simultaneous calls which are engaged in conference calls. (e.g., 4 eight-party conferences, 8 three-party conferences + 2 four-party conferences, 10 three-party conferences)

Feature Guide 137

1.13 Conference Features

1.13.1.2 Conference

Description

This PBX supports three through eight-party conference calls. During a two-party conversation, an extension user can add other parties to their conversation, thereby establishing a conference. More than four-party conferences are only possible when a PT user originates the conference.

Unattended Conference:

A PT user can leave a conference to allow other parties to continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference, if he desires.

Conditions

CONF (Conference) Button

For a PT which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button.

Unattended Conference Call Duration

The call duration can be restricted by the Unattended Conference Recall time. The

Unattended Conference Recall time consists of the following programmable timers:

a)

Unattended Conference Recall Start Time:

When the timer expires, Unattended Conference Recall starts to be heard at the conference originator. If the originator does not return to the conference, 1st

Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start.

b)

1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time:

When the timer expires, an alarm tone starts to be heard at parties in the Unattended

Conference. If the originator does not return to the conference, 2nd Unattended

Conference Recall Continuation time will start.

c)

2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time:

When the timer expires, the Unattended Conference call is disconnected.

If the originator returns to the conference before the Unattended Conference call is disconnected, the timer will be cancelled. If not, Unattended Conference Recall and an alarm tone will continue to be emitted until the Unattended Conference call is disconnected.

For Six or More Party Conference

The ECHO card is required. Also the Echocanceller should be enabled through system programming.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.6.4 ECHO16 Card

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.3 ECHO8 Card

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

138 Feature Guide

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation

1.13 Conference Features

Feature Guide 139

1.13 Conference Features

1.13.1.3 Privacy Release

Description

By default, all conversations which take place on trunk, extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy (Automatic Privacy).

Privacy Release allows a PT/PS user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S-CO button in order to establish a three-party call.

System programming is required to enable or disable this feature.

Conditions

S-CO Button

A flexible button can be customised as the S-CO button.

Privacy Release Time

Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined.

• This feature overrides Data Line Security (

1.10.5 Data Line Security) and Executive

Busy Override Deny (

1.7.2 Executive Busy Override).

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation

140 Feature Guide

1.14 Paging Features

1.14 Paging Features

1.14.1 Paging

Description

An extension user can make a voice announcement to many people simultaneously.

The message is announced over the built-in speakers of PT and/or external speakers (external pagers) which belong to the paging group. (With the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, up to two external pagers can be connected; with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30, one external pager can be connected.)

The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone.

It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.

Paging Deny:

It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis.

Paging Group

Each paging group consists of user groups and external pagers. One user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups.

(

2.2.2 Group)

[Example]

Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2

Feature Guide 141

1.14 Paging Features

[Programming Example]

Paging Group

No.

01

02

03

04

05

:

001

:

User Group No.

*1

002 003

: :

*1

:

: Constituent

User Groups of a Paging Group [640]

*2

:

External Pagers of a Paging Group [641]

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

External Pager No.

*2

1 2

: :

Conditions

• Extensions which cannot be paged are:

– PSs

– SLTs

– Ringing or busy PTs

– PTs in Paging Deny mode

– PTs in Paging DND mode

These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page.

External Pager Priority

External pagers can be used with the following priorities:

TAFAS Paging BGM

(

1.16.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS), 1.16.4 Background Music (BGM))

Volume Control

Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through system programming.

Paging DND

When DND (

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)) is set for incoming calls, it is programmable

whether your extension receives paging through system programming.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.6.1 Paging

1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement

142 Feature Guide

1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

1.15.1 Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Description

A PT user can call multiple parties, assigned as members of a group (broadcasting group), to make a voice announcement. After one member answers the call, the caller can begin to make an announcement. Other members' telephones will continue to ring, and each member can listen to the announcement by answering the call. The caller will hear a confirmation tone every time the members answer the call.

During the announcement, the voices of members will not be heard. However, the caller can allow specific members to speak, making a conference call. A maximum of four-party conference call can be established. This conversation can be heard by the other members.

Broadcasting Group

There are eight broadcasting group, and a maximum of 31 members can be assigned to each group. The available destinations as members of the broadcasting group are as follows:

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)

PS

Incoming Call Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)

Availability

*

*

*

*: Only available when the networking type of the trunk is assigned as private.

Conference Call

The caller can allow members to speak, and can control the conversation using the following buttons. Pressing the other buttons during the conversation will be ignored.

Feature Guide 143

1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

DSS

Button

CONF (Conference)

TRANSFER

FLASH/RECALL

(Flash/Recall mode)

SP-PHONE

Function

Establishes a conversation with the corresponding member extension, or remove the extension from the conversation.

Establishes a conversation with the current members in the order assigned in the broadcasting group. Pressing this button again will add the next available member in the group to the conversation.

Removes the member who joined the conversation last. The member can still listen to the announcement.

Removes the member who joined the conversation last. The member will be disconnected from the broadcasting call and hear a reorder tone.

Enables a hands-free conversation.

A member extension can inform to the caller that he wants to speak or join the conversation by sending a notification. The caller will hear a notification tone and the requesting extension’s information will be shown on the display for five seconds.

Conditions

Hardware Requirement: The MEC card

• COS programming determines the extensions (PTs only) that can use this feature.

Ring Duration

A system timer is available to limit the call ring duration at the members. When this limit is reached, members' telephones will stop ringing. If no members have answered the call, the caller will hear a busy tone.

• The broadcasting call will reach a member extension regardless of settings such as Call

Forwarding (except DND).

• If a member extension is busy and has Call Waiting for trunk calls activated when a broadcasting call is made, a call waiting tone will be sent to the extension.

• The call information of the caller (not members) will be recorded on the SMDR.

• A caller cannot make a broadcasting call with a call on hold.

• Call Pickup is not available for a broadcasting call. (

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)

• The broadcasting call will not reach members when:

– the member extension has set DND for intercom calls.

– the member extension is a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode. (

1.24.5

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.3.2 MEC Card

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.6 MEC Card

144 Feature Guide

1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.6.3 Making an Announcement and Having a Multiple Party Conversation

(Broadcasting)(KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Feature Guide 145

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16.1 Doorphone Call

Description

A visitor using a doorphone will call a preprogrammed destination (extension or outside party).

Extension users can call a doorphone.

Conditions

Hardware Requirement:

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: An optional Doorphone, the OPB card and DPH card

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30: An optional Doorphone and the DPH card

• Each doorphone port must be assigned to one tenant. The Time Table (day/lunch/break/ night) of the tenant applies. (

2.2.4 Time Service)

Call Destination

The incoming doorphone call destination(s) can be assigned for each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) for each doorphone port (

Doorphone Call Destination [720]).

Destinations can be selected. (

1.1.2.1 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY)

• COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call.

• Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone. (

1.1.2.2 Internal

Call Block)

Ring Duration

If an incoming call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and the call is cancelled.

Call Duration

The call duration can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be disconnected.

Door Open

While engaged on a doorphone call, the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. (

1.16.2 Door Open)

• A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port (

Doorphone Number

Reference [729]).

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only

Doorphones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) cannot make a call simultaneously. If a visitor presses the doorphone button while the other doorphone is engaged in a call, he will hear no tone.

Doorphones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) cannot receive a call simultaneously. If an extension user calls a doorphone while the other doorphone is engaged in a call, he will hear a busy tone.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.6.1 OPB3 Card

2.6.2 DPH4 Card

2.6.3 DPH2 Card

146 Feature Guide

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.1 DPH4 Card

6.5.2 DPH2 Card

6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

User Manual References

User Manual

1.9.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected

1.16 Optional Device Features

Feature Guide 147

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16.2 Door Open

Description

An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone.

The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in the COS programming (

Permission for Door Open Access [512]). However, while engaged on a

doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in (

1.16.1

Doorphone Call).

Conditions

Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener on each door.

• The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed.

Door Open Duration

The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period (

Door Open Duration

Time [207]).

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

User Manual References

User Manual

1.9.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected

148 Feature Guide

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Description

A ring tone is sent through the external pager when an incoming call is received. Any extension user can answer the call.

Conditions

Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager

Floating Extension Number

A floating extension number can be assigned for an external pager (

External Pager

Floating Extension Number [700]). It is possible to access an external pager by dialling

their floating extension numbers.

Pager Volume

It is possible to change the volume of an external pager through system programming.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

User Manual References

User Manual

1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])

Feature Guide 149

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16.4 Background Music (BGM)

Description

A PT user can listen to BGM through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle.

BGM—External:

BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers, this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager.

Conditions

[BGM]

Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio

• The music through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook.

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only

Each user can set/cancel BGM, and also select the music source.

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only

Each user can only set/cancel BGM; the user cannot make a music selection.

[BGM—External]

Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager

• External pagers can be used with the following priorities:

TAFAS Paging BGM

(

1.14.1 Paging, 1.16.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS))

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)

2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)

150 Feature Guide

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Description

An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages

(OGMs) for the following features:

Feature

Direct Inward System

Access (DISA)

Queuing Feature

Timed Reminder

Usage Details in

When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear a message.

• 1.16.6 Direct

Inward

System

Access

(DISA)

If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution group (

Sequences in

Queuing Time Table [631]), any caller who is

waiting in a queue will hear a message.

• 1.2.2.3

Queuing

Feature

When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm, the user will hear a message.

• 1.26.4

Timed

Reminder

Conditions

Hardware Requirement:

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: The OPB card and MSG card

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30: The MSG card

The Number of Messages and the Recording Time

A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 32 (with the KX-TDA15/KX-

TDA30) messages can be recorded. The recording time per message is a maximum of one minute. However the total recording time in the PBX is 8 minutes.

• A floating extension number can be assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) (

Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]).

• One MSG card allows 4 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 2 (with the KX-TDA15/KX-

TDA30) messages to play simultaneously. The MSG card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages. It increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously.

[Example]

Up to 4 (with the KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 2

(with the KX-TDA15/KX-

TDA30) messages can be played simultaneously to callers.

Up to

8

(with the KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 4

(with the KX-TDA15/KX-

TDA30) messages can be played simultaneously to callers.

PBX

MSG

Card

Total message recording time:

8 minutes max.

PBX

MSG

Card

MSG

Card

Total message recording time:

8 minutes max.

Feature Guide 151

1.16 Optional Device Features

Note

When MSG card expansion has been completed, the new MSG card is blank—all necessary messages will need to be stored in the card. This can be done in two ways:

a)

By installing the new MSG card then recording each message again. The PBX will automatically store the new recordings in each MSG card.

b)

By transferring messages from the PBX to a personal computer (PC) using the

Maintenance Console, then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG card installed.

• The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers.

Recording Methods a)

Record voice messages through the extension telephone

b)

Transfer prerecorded voice messages from external sound source into the PBX via an external music port.

Note

Record voice messages only; avoid the recording of music.

• After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation.

• Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time period, or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message. The longer one is applied.

• Record a message when traffic is light (early morning or late evening).

• When the manager tries to record a message, he will hear ringback tone if a message channel is in use. When all ports of the MSG card(s) become idle, he will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed time period.

After that, the PBX will automatically proceed into the recording mode.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.6.1 OPB3 Card

2.6.5 MSG4 Card

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.4 MSG2 Card

User Manual References

User Manual

2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)

152 Feature Guide

1.16 Optional Device Features

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Description

An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user on the PBX, when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The caller can have direct access to features such as:

• Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for remote system administration, an external pager for TAFAS).

• Calling an outside party via the PBX.

• Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD)

Outgoing Message (OGM)

When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller.

Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). (

1.16.5

Outgoing Message (OGM))

DISA Intercept—No Dial

If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for

Intercept) (

DISA Intercept Time [211]) following the outgoing message (OGM), the call is

redirected to the operator extension.

DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service)

After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other DISA floating extension number as the destination (Multistep

DISA AA Service).

If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for

AA), the DISA AA service is not employed.

DISA Security Mode and Available Features

If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security (

DISA Security Mode [732]). The features available depend on the

preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows:

Feature Guide 153

1.16 Optional Device Features

Security

Mode

Intercom

Call

TIE Line Call

Without PBX

Code

With PBX

Code

All

Security

Trunk

Security

No

Security

Trunk Call

*

: Available

*

:

If trunk call is available, Account Code Entry (

1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry) is also

available.

Note

DISA AA service and Operator Call (

2.2.5 Operator Features) are available for any

security mode.

Security Mode Override:

If the caller operates with the following features while hearing a DISA message, the security mode can be changed to the No Security mode temporarily:

• Walking COS (

1.8.5 Walking COS): Walking COS feature number + extension

number + extension personal identification number (PIN)

• Verified Code Entry (

1.8.6 Verified Code Entry): Verified Code Entry feature

number + + verified code + verified code PIN

After changing mode, the mode remains in force for the duration of the call.

Available PBX Features with Security Mode Override:

After Security Mode Override is done with the Walking COS feature, the following features are available (It regards a remote operation from the assigned extension [

1.26.5 Remote

Extension Control by User]):

• FWD

• DND

• Log-in/Log-out (

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out)

• Absent Message (

1.18.2 Absent Message)

• Extension Lock (

1.8.3 Extension Lock)

• Time Service Switching Mode (

2.2.4 Time Service)

DISA Intercept Routing—Busy/DND

If the destination called by the outside party is busy or in DND mode, and if (1) the busy destination does not set Call Waiting, FWD, or Idle Extension Hunting or (2) the destination is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available, one of the following can be selected through system programming:

a)

Busy Tone: Busy tone is sent to the caller.

154 Feature Guide

1.16 Optional Device Features b)

Intercept Routing: Intercept Routing—Busy/DND will work and the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination.

c)

Outgoing Message (OGM): An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller.

The message for busy/DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message

(OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number.

DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer

If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period

(DISA Intercept time) (

DISA Intercept Time [211]) after the call is reached, the call will be

redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature (

Trunk Group Intercept

Destination [470] or Extension Intercept Destination [604]).

If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected.

SMDR

The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers.

(

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))

[Programming Example]

The following items can be assigned to each outgoing message (OGM):

Outgoing

Message

(OGM) No.

01

02

:

Floating

Extn.

No.

*1

300

0 1

Automated Attendant No.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205

Busy/DND

Message No.

04

301

: : : : : : : : : : :

05

:

*1

:

Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]

Feature Guide 155

1.16 Optional Device Features

[Flowchart]

A DISA call from an outside party is received.

No

Is there an idle port on the

MSG cards?

A

Yes

(DISA Delayed Answer Time

Time-out)

The PBX answers the call.

(DISA Mute Time

Time-out)

The outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling.

F

Does the trunk group that received the call employ Intercept

Routing Busy DND?

Yes

The call is routed to the intercept destination.

Is the first digit dialled?

Yes

The outgoing message (OGM) stops.

No

(DISA 1st Dial Time for

Intercept Time-out)

The call is routed to the Operator.

(Intercept Routing No Destination)

No

The call is routed to the operator .

(Intercept Routing

No Destination)

Is the second digit dialled?

No

Goes to

C

(DISA 2nd Dial Time for

AA Time-out)

Yes

No

The PBX receives the following dialled digits and checks the dialled number.

Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service?

Yes

The call is routed to the destination.

What is the DISA security mode?

Continued to the next page

156 Feature Guide

1.16 Optional Device Features

Continued from the previous page

B

Trunk Security

Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number?

Yes

Goes to

C

No

All Security

Is the Walking COS/Verified

Code Entry feature number dialled for Security Mode Override?

What is the dialled number?

No

Yes

Is the correct personal identification number

(PIN) entered?

Yes

Others

Goes to

D

Trunk Access No.

+ Telephone No.

Feature No.

*

(e.g., FWD)

The feature is set.

The dialled number is sent to the trunk.

Extension No./

Floating

Extension No.

C

No

Reorder tone

D

Goes to

B

E

Is the extension idle?

Yes

The extension receives the call.

No

Is the extension busy (Call Waiting mode on) and is not in DND mode?

Yes

The call waits to be received.

No

Does the caller press while hearing reorder tone (Call Retry)?

Yes

No

(DISA Reorder Tone

Duration Time

Time-out)

Goes to

What method is assigned for DISA Intercept

Routing Busy/DND?

A

The call is disconnected.

No

Does the caller press while hearing a ringback tone (Call Retry)?

Yes

Does the destination answer the call?

Goes to

A

No

(DISA Intercept Time

Time-out)

Yes

The call is established.

The call is routed to the intercept destination.

(DISA Intercept Routing

No Answer)

The extension becomes idle.

Intercept Routing

Busy Tone

Outgoing

Message

(OGM)

Goes to

E

No

(Busy Tone

Does the caller press while hearing busy tone (Call Retry)?

Time Time-out)

Yes

The call is disconnected.

Goes to

A

The call is routed to the intercept destination.

(Intercept Routing Busy/DND)

The message for the busy/DND mode is sent to the caller.

Goes to

F

Does the destination answer the call?

Yes

No

(DISA Disconnect

Time after Intercept

Time-out)

The call is established.

The call is disconnected.

Goes to

E

*

:

Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used for Security Mode Override.

Feature Guide 157

1.16 Optional Device Features

Conditions

WARNING

When you enable the Trunk-to-Trunk Call feature of DISA, and a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)

Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.

b)

Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.

c)

Change the PIN frequently.

Hardware Requirement:

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: The OPB card and MSG card

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30: The MSG card

DISA Delayed Answer Time

It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time (

DISA Delayed Answer Time [209]) so that

the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM).

DISA Mute Time

It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line.

Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration

If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer. (

1.10.8 Trunk Call Limitation) If the timer expires, the line will be

disconnected unless the originating caller retries by pressing " " or extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling. The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period (

DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210]) and

preprogramming number of times.

Tone Detection

The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA.

– Silence Detection (

DISA Silence Detection [475])

– Continuous Signal Detection (

DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476])

– Cyclic Signal Detection (

DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477])

Call Retry

While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing

" ". During a trunk-to-trunk conversation, the result of pressing " " is programmable: retry mode or DTMF mode.

DISA Reorder Tone Duration

It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. Reorder tone will be sent to the caller for a preprogrammed time period. When the timer expires the call will be disconnected. Retrying the call is possible by pressing " " during the DISA Reorder Tone

Duration time.

Call Deny

Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis.

Verified Code PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock

If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN against

158 Feature Guide

1.16 Optional Device Features

the verified code or the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and will be cleared.

• Each outgoing message (OGM) call have a name through system programming (

Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731]) for programming reference.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.6.1 OPB3 Card

2.6.5 MSG4 Card

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.4 MSG2 Card

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access

[DISA])

1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)

Feature Guide 159

1.17 Caller ID Features

1.17 Caller ID Features

1.17.1 Caller ID

Description

The PBX receives caller’s information, such as the caller’s name and telephone number, on trunks assigned to receive Caller ID. A display PT user can see the information.

The PBX can modify the received number according to preprogrammed tables so that he can call back or memorise it. For example, if the area code is sent and it is not required to return the call, store the area code in the table so that the area code is deleted automatically.

Caller ID to SLT Port (KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only):

An SLT user can also see the caller’s information. This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with FSK type Caller ID.

Note

This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) type

FSK and Bellcore type FSK.

1.

Features

Caller ID includes the following features:

Feature

Caller ID (KX-

TDA30/KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200 only)

Description

Caller’s information which is sent from

an analogue trunk.

The following Caller ID signalling types are supported: FSK and DTMF.

Calling Line

Identification

Presentation (CLIP)

Caller’s information which is sent from

an ISDN line.

Automatic Number

Identification (ANI)

(KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

Caller’s information which is sent from an E1 or T1 line.

Details in

• 1.20.1.2

Calling/

Connected Line

Identification

Presentation

(CLIP/COLP)

• 1.21.1 E1 Line

Service (KX-

TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

• 1.22.1 T1 Line

Service (KX-

TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

160 Feature Guide

1.17 Caller ID Features

2.

Service Features

Features Description Details in

Calling Line

Identification (CLI)

Distribution

Directs a DIL/DID/DDI/MSN call to a CLI destination if the caller’s identification (Caller

ID/CLIP/ANI) has been assigned to the Caller

ID Table.

• 1.1.1.5 Calling

Line

Identification

(CLI)

Distribution

Incoming Call Log

Caller’s information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension. This information is used for confirming the caller, calling the caller back, and/or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed

Dialling.

• 1.17.2

Incoming Call

Log

3.

Number/Name Assignment

3.1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification

This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller’s number according to preprogrammed tables. The modified number will be recorded for calling back.

The PBX supports a number of modification tables, and each trunk group can select a table for use. Each table has ten locations for local/international calls and one for long distance calls.

The PBX checks the local/international call data first. If a match is not found, the long distance call data is applied.

[Example]

<Table Selection>

Trunk

Group No.

1

2

:

Modification

Table

1

3

:

<Modification Table>

Modification Table 1

Area Code Removed No. of Digits Added No.

Local/International

Call Data 1

Local/International

Call Data 2

:

Local/International

Call Data 10

Long Distance Call

Data 1

012

00

:

Not programmable

3

2

:

0

Blank

001

:

0

Note

When caller’s information is sent through an ISDN line and the call type is Subscriber,

National, or International, the following modification table is used instead of the above table:

<Modification Table>

Subscriber Call Data

National Call Data

International Call Data

Removed No. of Digits Added No.

0

0

0

Blank

0

00

Feature Guide 161

1.17 Caller ID Features

<Modification Flowchart>

A trunk call with the caller's information is received.

Checks the Table Selection.

Table 1

Yes: e.g., 00987654321

Checks the local/ international call data.

Matches (Data 2)

Modifies the number as programmed.

Removed number of digits: 2

Added number: 001

Received number: 00987654321

Is the area code found in local/international call data in the modification table?

No: e.g., 3344556677

Checks the long distance call data.

Modifies the number as programmed.

(Removed number of digits: 0,

Added number: 0)

Modified number: 00987654321 = 001987654321

1) Remove the first 2 digits.

2) Add "001".

Modification is completed:

03344556677.

Modification is completed:

001987654321.

3.2 Caller ID Table Assignment

The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table.

In each location of the table, the following items can be assigned:

a) Telephone number (Trunk Access number + caller’s telephone number)

b) System Speed Dialling name (caller’s name)

(shown on the display or SMDR)

c) CLI destination

(used for CLI feature)

When a caller’s modified telephone number matches a telephone number (the Trunk

Access number is disregarded.) in the table, the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination.

162 Feature Guide

1.17 Caller ID Features

[Example]

Location

(System Speed

Dialling No.)

000

001

:

Telephone No.

*1

System Speed Dialling

Name

*2

CLI

Destination

90123456789

:

:

ABC Company

:

:

200

:

:

*1 :

*2 :

System Speed Dialling Number [001]

System Speed Dialling Name [002]

3.3 Caller’s Name Reference

A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR. The PBX searches for the name in the following order:

1) Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension

2) System Speed Dialling (Caller ID) Table

3) Caller ID name received from the public line (Caller ID Name Reference)

If the name is not found, it will not be displayed.

Conditions

[General]

• Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming (

Caller ID Signal

Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)).

• The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network.

For Users in New Zealand only

Using the toll services of a company other than Telecom NZ.

If the PBX is set up to use the toll services of a company other than Telecom NZ, the telephone numbers dialled from the Caller Display listings within the PBX will be directed through the toll services of the other company because the telephone numbers include the toll access digit and area code digit. A toll charge may be incurred. Please check with the toll carrier concerned.

[Caller ID to SLT Port (KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only)]

Hardware Requirement: The EXT-CID card

• Through system programming, a group of 4 SLT or Super Hybrid ports can be assigned to receive Caller ID. Up to 2 groups can be programmed. Therefore, a maximum of 8 SLTs can receive Caller ID.

• When the caller’s number is sent to an SLT, a Trunk Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming for calling back.

• When the caller’s number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits, not counting the preceding Trunk Access number (if it is programmed to be added).

• If a call is transferred to an SLT, the transferring extension’s information will be shown on the SLT. If the transferring extension goes on-hook, the original caller’s information will be shown.

• When the Caller ID has information, such as private, out of area, or long distance, the information will be shown instead of the caller’s number and name.

Feature Guide 163

1.17 Caller ID Features

• For an SLT that is connected to a DPT in parallel, Caller ID information is available only when the SLT is set to "ring".

• Even if the caller’s name is sent, the name may not be shown depending on the type of

SLT.

• Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT.

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

164 Feature Guide

1.17 Caller ID Features

1.17.2 Incoming Call Log

Description

When an incoming public trunk call with the caller’s information (e.g., Caller ID) is directed to an extension, the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension.

This information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller, calling back, or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling.

[Example]

John White

123456789

12 Dec.10:00AM MON

New: Not Answered

--- Caller's name (20 digits max.)

--- Caller's number (16 digits max.)

--- Date and time of a call received

--- Answering Status*

Call Log buttons

Own extension

Incoming call distribution group

*: "

New

" is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed;

"

Old

" is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed.

Conditions

Call Log Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension or an incoming call distribution group. The button light shows the current status as follows:

Light pattern

Red on

Off

Status

There is unchecked information.

All information has been checked.

If the answering destination is not the original extension (FWD—No Answer,

Intercept Routing—No Answer, Overflow, and Call Pickup):

If a call is forwarded because of no answer or another extension picks up the call, the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination. If a call is forwarded to several extensions before answered, the information is logged in the call logs for all the forwarded extensions. If a call is forwarded to an incoming call distribution group and is not answered, the information is not logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group.

Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls

If the original destination of a call is an incoming call distribution group, and the call is not answered, the information is logged in the call log for the group. If it is answered, the information is logged in the call log for the answering extension.

Call Log for PS Calls

If a PS or a CS is in one of the following situations when a call arrives, the information is logged in the call log for the PS:

Feature Guide 165

1.17 Caller ID Features a)

When the PS is out of range.

b)

When the PS is turned off.

c)

When the CS is busy.

Incoming Call Log Display Lock

An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log display to prevent other users from referring to the call information at his extension through personal programming (Directory and Call Log Lock). In this case, the Outgoing Call Log display and the Personal Speed

Dialling number display is also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))

Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling

When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log information, the Idle Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number.

Incoming Call Log Memory

The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX. The maximum number that can be logged for each extension and incoming call distribution group is also determined through system programming. If the memory becomes full, the new call record overwrites the oldest one.

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.11.1 Using the Call Log

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

166 Feature Guide

1.18 Message Features

1.18 Message Features

1.18.1 Message Waiting

Description

An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user. The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages left in his mailbox of the

VPS.

When a message is left on a PT, the Message button on it lights or the Message/Ringer Lamp on it turns on red. Pressing the lit Message button while on-hook shows the caller’s information as shown below:

[Example]

105:Tom Smith

--- Extension no. and name of who left the message

Message buttons

Own extension

Incoming call distribution group

Other extension*

*: For example, this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss (Boss &

Secretary Feature).

Conditions

Message Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension, other extensions, or an incoming call distribution group.

Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting

If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension. (

1.27.1 Dial Tone)

SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT, if an MSLC card is connected to the PBX. The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the twelve patterns shown below. System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature.

Feature Guide 167

1.18 Message Features

[SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns]

5.12 s

1.28 s

Pattern 1

ON

OFF

5.12 s

1.28 s

Pattern 2

ON

OFF

512 ms

1.28 s

5.12 s

Pattern 3

ON

OFF

256 ms

2.56 s

768 ms

Pattern 4

ON

OFF

256 ms

768 ms

5.12 s

Pattern 5

ON

OFF

256 ms

2.56 s

512 ms

Pattern 6

ON

OFF

10.24 s

1.28 s

Pattern 7

ON

OFF

256 ms

1.28 s

20.48 s

Pattern 8

ON

OFF

256 ms

1.28 s

10.24 s

Pattern 9

ON

OFF

20.48 s

1.28 s

Pattern 10

ON

OFF

168 Feature Guide

1.18 Message Features

20.48 s t

10.24 s t=1.28 s

10.24 s

Pattern 11

ON

OFF t

10.24 s t=1.28 s

10.24 s 20.48 s

Pattern 12

ON

OFF

• It is possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone.

• Messages are always left on the original extension. Messages cannot be sent to their

FWD destination (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)).

• Both the message sending extension and receiving extension can cancel a left message.

• If the message receiving extension calls the sending extension and is answered, the message will be cleared automatically. However, if the message has been left on the VPS, it depends on the VPS.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

1.9.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected

Feature Guide 169

1.18 Message Features

1.18.2 Absent Message

Description

The extension users can set the message (e.g., the reason for absence, where he is) on his telephone. When display PT user calls the extension, the message is shown on the caller’s telephone.

The following messages can be programmed as desired:

Type

System message

Personal message

Message

No.

1

Message (Example)

Will Return Soon

2

3

4

5

Description

Gone Home

At Ext %%%%

(Extension

Number)

Back at %%:%%

(Hour:Minute)

Out until %%/%%

(Month/Day)

Messages may be edited through system programming

(

Absent Message [008]).

They are used for every extension user commonly.

6

7

8

9

In a Meeting

A message is programmable at each extension through personal programming

(Personal Absent Message), which can only be used by that extension user.

Note

The "%" means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension.

Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.

Conditions

• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the extension while on-hook.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

170 Feature Guide

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.19.1 Fixed Buttons

Description

PTs, DSS Consoles, and Add-on Key Modules are provided with the following feature/Line

Access buttons:

Depending on your device type, some buttons may not be provided.

As for buttons on PSs, please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS.

[PT and Add-on Key Module]

Button Usage

Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset volume and the display contrast. Navigator Key and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display.

Navigator Key,

Jog Dial,

Volume Key

ENTER

CANCEL

PROGRAM

FLASH/

RECALL

HOLD

VOL

Used to confirm the selected item.

Used to cancel the selected item.

Used to enter and exit the programming mode.

Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode) or used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features (External

Feature Access mode). This button can also be used as a

CANCEL button while on-hook.

Used to place a call on hold.

Feature Guide 171

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Button

SP-PHONE

(Speakerphone)

MONITOR

MESSAGE

REDIAL

TRANSFER

Flexible CO (Trunk)

INTERCOM

AUTO ANS

(Auto Answer)/

MUTE

VOICE CALL/

MUTE

AUTO DIAL/

STORE

CONF

(Conference)

FWD/DND

PAUSE

Soft

SELECT

SHIFT

MODE

[DSS Console]

Button

ANSWER

RELEASE

172 Feature Guide

Usage

Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch between handset and hands-free operation.

Used for a hands-free dialling. Also used to monitor the party’s voice in hands-free mode.

Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication.

Used to redial the last dialled number.

Used to transfer a call to another party.

Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different Trunk Access button (Default: S-CO) or to another feature button.

Used to make or receive intercom calls.

Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode, or used for microphone or handset mute during a conversation. (Dual feature button)

Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a handsfree conversation is not possible). Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation.

Used for System/Personal Speed Dialling and storing programme changes.

Used to establish a multiple-party conversation.

Used to perform FWD or DND. (Dual feature button)

Used to insert a pause in a stored number. With an APT, it is used as the PROGRAM button.

Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display.

Used to select the displayed item or to call the displayed number.

Used to access the second level of Soft button items.

Used to shift the display to access various features.

Usage

Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on hold and answer another call with one-touch.

Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer.

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Button

Flexible CO (Trunk)

Flexible DSS (Direct Station

Selection)

PF (Programmable Feature)

Usage

Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button.

Used to access an extension with one-touch. Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other features.

Used to access a preprogrammed feature with one-touch.

(no default)

Conditions

• Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status.

Feature Guide 173

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

Description

Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming. The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs, DSS Consoles, Add-on Key Modules, and/or

PSs:

a)

Flexible CO buttons

b)

Flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons

c)

Programmable Feature (PF) buttons

[Button Usage]

Button

Single-CO (S-CO)

Group-CO (G-CO)

Loop-CO (L-CO)

Direct Station Selection

(DSS)

One-touch Dialling

Incoming Call Distribution

(ICD) Group

Message

FWD/DND (External/

Internal/Both) *

Group FWD (External/

Internal/Both)

Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with onetouch.

Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or receiving calls.

Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication.

Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension.

The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both.

Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call distribution group. The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both.

Used to enter an account code.

Account Code Entry

(Account)

Conference

Terminate

Usage

Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls.

Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making calls. Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button.

Used to access an idle trunk for making calls. Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button.

Used to access an extension with one-touch.

External Feature Access

(EFA)

Charge Reference

Call Park

Call Park (Automatic Park

Zone)

Used to establish a multiparty conversation.

Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up.

Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features.

Used to check the total call charge for your own extension.

Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone.

Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically.

174 Feature Guide

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Call Log

Button

Log-in/Log-out *

Hurry-up

Wrap-up *

System Alarm

Time Service *

Usage

Used to show the incoming call information.

Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode.

Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination.

Used to switch the Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes.

Used to confirm a PBX error.

Used to switch the assigned time modes: day, lunch, break or night. Also used to check the current time mode status.

Answer

Release

Used to answer an incoming call.

Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.

Toll Restriction/Call Barring Used to change the TRS/Barring level of other extension users temporarily.

ISDN Service

Used to access an ISDN service.

Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service.

Calling Line Identification

Restriction (CLIR) *

Connected Line

Identification Restriction

(COLR) *

Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service.

ISDN Hold

Headset

Used to transfer a call using the telephone company.

Used to turn on/off the headset mode while idle.

Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes during a conversation.

Time Service Switching

Mode (Automatic/Manual) *

Used to switch between the Automatic Switching and Manual

Switching mode.

Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.

Two-way Record

Two-way Transfer

One-touch Two-way

Transfer

Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension.

Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with one-touch.

Live Call Screening (LCS)

Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call.

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer

Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension.

*: One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature settings. The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period.

Conditions

• The Flexible DSS button lights of the KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 shows only "Off" or "Red

On". If the button is customised as a button which shows other light patterns, the other light patterns also show only as "Red On".

Feature Guide 175

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.3 Customising the Buttons

176 Feature Guide

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.19.3 LED Indication

Description

The light (LED: Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and following buttons (Line

Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button) show line conditions with a variety of light patterns.

Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group

Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS

1.

Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp

[DPT]

• Incoming call from a trunk: Red flashing

• Incoming call from another extension: Green flashing

• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on

• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off

[APT]

• Incoming call: Red flashing

• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on

• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off

Feature Guide 177

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

2.

Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons

Line Status

Button:

Light

Pattern

Off

Green on

Slow green flashing

Moderate green flashing

Rapid green flashing

Red on

Slow red flashing

Rapid red flashing

S-CO

Trunk Status

Intercom

Line Status

G-CO L-CO INTERCOM

Idle

This extension is using the line.

This extension is holding the line.

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group Line

Status

ICD Group

This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an Unattended Conference.

Incoming call/Privacy

Release

Incoming call for another extension/

Another extension is using the line/Another extension has the line on Exclusive

Hold.

Another extension is holding the line.

Other extensions are using all trunks in the trunk group.

Incoming call

Incoming call to the incoming call distribution group in Ring distribution method

This extension is logged out of the incoming call distribution group.

3.

Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button

Corresponding

Extension

Status Button

DSS

Light Pattern

Off

Red on

Rapid red flashing

Idle

Busy/Incoming call

*

1

/DND for trunk calls

Incoming call

*

2

*1

: Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled.

*2

: Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled.

178 Feature Guide

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

4.

Flashing Light Patterns

1 s

Slow Flashing

Moderate Flashing

Rapid Flashing

Conditions

• The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority:

ICD Group S-CO G-CO L-CO INTERCOM

• The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming call can be set to "Off" through system programming. In this case, the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension.

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

1.12.1 Call Hold

1.13.1.2 Conference

1.13.1.3 Privacy Release

Feature Guide 179

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.19.4 Display Information

Description

A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available:

Display Item

The extension number and name of the calling or called extension, or incoming call distribution group

123: Tom Smith

Status of the called extension

Display Example

123: Busy

Door 02: 1st Door

– The number and name of the optional device

The dialled telephone number

1234567890

The received call information a) Caller’s name b) Caller’s number c) Trunk number/name d) Original Destination, if the call is forwarded e) DDI/DID/MSN name or number

Call charge fee during a trunk call.

ABC Company

12345678

Line 001: Sales

102:Mike

Panasonic

Condition

The first line message can be either (a), (c), or (e) at each extension through system programming.

Call duration during a trunk call.

12.35

The currency (

Currency [131]),

position of the currency symbol, and the decimal point (

Decimal Point

Position for Currency

[130]) are

programmable.

Line 001 11:02’28

Conditions

Multilingual Display

Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display

Language Selection).

Display Contrast

It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming (Display

Contrast Selection). This is available only for DPTs.

Display Backlight

Each extension can select its display backlight on or off through personal programming

(Display Backlight Selection). This is available for the KX-T7633 and KX-T7636.

• Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the display’s size limitation are not displayed. In this case, information which have been programmed is hidden, but not altered.

180 Feature Guide

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Feature Guide 181

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

Service Features

1.20.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

1.20.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Description

ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network. ISDN transmits voice, data, and image in digital format. ISDN lines, if available, can be connected to public line (trunk), private line

(QSIG), or ISDN terminal devices (extension).

1.

ISDN Interface and Configuration

Interface Type Description Port Mode

Basic Rate

Interface (BRI)

Provides two 64 kbps B channels for communication and one 16 kbps D channel for signalling (2B

+ D).

Trunk,

Extension

QSIG (Master,

Slave)

Configuration

Type

*

Point-to-Point/

Point-tomultipoint

Point-to-Point

Primary Rate

Interface (PRI)

Provides thirty or twenty-three 64 kbps B channels for communication and one 64 kbps

D channel for signalling (30B + D/

23B + D).

Trunk, QSIG

(Master, Slave),

Extension

Point-to-Point

* :

BRI Configuration [426] *For BRI only

Note

Point-to-Point (P-P):

One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port.

Point-to-multipoint (P-MP):

A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port.

182 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

2.

ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network

Direct Dialling In

(DDI)

Service

Multiple

Subscriber

Number (MSN)

Description

Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. (P-P only)

One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10

MSNs for routing incoming calls. (P-MP only)

Calling Line

Identification

Presentation

(CLIP)

Connected Line

Identification

Presentation

(COLP)

Calling Line

Identification

Restriction (CLIR)

Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller.

Connected Line

Identification

Restriction

(COLR)

Subaddressing

(SUB)

Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.

You may add digits after the telephone number.

These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device.

Details in

• 1.1.1.3 Direct

Inward Dialling

(DID)/Direct

Dialling In

(DDI)

• 1.1.1.4

Multiple

Subscriber

Number

(MSN) Ringing

Service

Sends the caller’s telephone number to the network when making a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.

Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call. The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected.

• 1.20.1.2

Calling/

Connected

Line

Identification

Presentation

(CLIP/COLP)

User-to-user

Signalling Type 1

(UUS-1)

Advice of Charge

(AOC)

Call Forwarding

(CF)—by ISDN

Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1.

The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company.

• 1.20.1.3

Advice of

Charge (AOC)

Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company.

• 1.20.1.4 Call

Forwarding

(CF)—by

ISDN (P-MP)

• 1.20.1.5 Call

Forwarding

(CF)—by

ISDN (P-P)

Feature Guide 183

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

Service

Call Hold

(HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Transfer

(CT)—by ISDN

Three-party

Conference

(3PTY)—by ISDN

Malicious Call

Identification

(MCID)

Completion of

Calls to Busy

Subscriber

(CCBS)

Description

Puts one ISDN call on hold.

Details in

• 1.20.1.6 Call

Hold

(HOLD)—by

ISDN

Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party. Call

Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement are available.

• 1.20.1.7 Call

Transfer

(CT)—by

ISDN

Establishes a three-party conference call using the ISDN service of the telephone company.

• 1.20.1.8

Three-party

Conference

(3PTY)—by

ISDN

An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller. Information on the malicious call will be received later on.

• 1.20.1.9

Malicious Call

Identification

(MCID)

If an outside called party is busy, an extension can receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free.

• 1.20.1.10

Completion of

Calls to Busy

Subscriber

(CCBS)

3.

ISDN Centrex Service

An extension user can have access to the features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company (e.g., Call Transfer). This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash/recall signal. This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port.

4.

Private Networking Connection (QSIG)

Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line. The QSIG mode, Master or

Slave, can be enabled on an ISDN port basis.

5.

ISDN Extension (

1.20.1.11 ISDN Extension)

An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for extension connection. While the extension connection is enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 fax machine, personal computer) or a behind PBX can be connected to the port.

When the ISDN port is in P-P configuration, one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port. When the ISDN port is in P-MP configuration, a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously.

Conditions

Overlap/En bloc

ISDN call dialling mode, Overlap or En bloc, can be selected for each ISDN port. When

"

Overlap

" is selected, the PBX sends each dialled digit individually. When "

En bloc

" is selected, the PBX sends all of dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises end of dialling as follows:

184 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

– Dialling #, if programmed

– Dialling a preprogrammed telephone number

– Inter-digit timer expires.

• Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol (

1.20.1.12 ISDN

Service Access by Keypad Protocol).

Extension Number

An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port.

Network Type

Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country/area (

BRI Network

Type [420] *For BRI only).

L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode

The active mode of Layer 1 (L1) (

BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424] *For BRI only) and the

data link mode of Layer 2 (L2) (

BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425] *For BRI only) can be

selected individually, Permanent or Call by Call, on an ISDN port basis.

TEI Assignment Mode

The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis (

BRI TEI Mode [427] *For BRI only).

Bearer Mode

The bearer mode can be assigned on an extension basis.

Automatic ISDN Configuration

ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically through system programming.

The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN (BRI) port:

– L1 Active Mode

– L2 Data Link Mode

– Access Mode (Point-to-Point/Point-to-Multipoint)

– TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00–63/Automatic)

Feature Guide References

1.28.3 QSIG Network

Feature Guide 185

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation

(CLIP/COLP)

Description

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP):

The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.

Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP):

The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered.

These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:

ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) supplementary service.

ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) supplementary service.

[CLIP Example]

1) Dials

"87654321".

2) "12345678" is displayed.

PBX

ISDN

Caller

(CLIP/COLP No.: 12345678)

Called party

(CLIP/COLP No.: 87654321)

[COLP Example]

1) Dials

"111222333".

Caller

3) "111222444" is displayed.

ISDN

PBX

Called party

(CLIP/COLP No.:

111222333)

FWD, IRNA, etc.

Answering party

(CLIP/COLP No.:

111222444)

2) Answers the call.

186 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

CLIP/COLP Number:

The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned as follows:

• CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN port (subscriber’s number) (

BRI Subscriber

Number [422] *For BRI only)

• CLIP/COLP number for each extension (

CLIP/COLP Number [606])

• CLIP/COLP number for each incoming call distribution group

Each extension can select either the CLIP/COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used. The CLIP/COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button.

Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.

These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:

ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) supplementary service.

ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) supplementary service.

Conditions

• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.

• The CLIP/COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP/COLP number, such as a doorphone.

COLP/CLIR/COLR Assignment for Each Port

Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.

CLIR Button and COLR Button

It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button.

• The CLIP/COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company. Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number.

• When using a private network, the extension number assigned for each extension through system programming (

Extension Number [003]) is sent for CLIP/COLP. (

1.28.3.2

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected

Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG)

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])

1.7.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone

(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])

1.7.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling

Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])

Feature Guide 187

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Description

The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company.

There are the following types:

Type

Advice of Charge During Call

(AOC-D)

Advice of Charge

At End of Call (AOC-E)

Description

AOC is received during the call and when the call is completed.

AOC is received when the call is completed.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge (AOC) supplementary service Digital

Subscriber Signalling System No. One (DSS1) protocol.

Conditions

• A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call.

Budget Management

If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit, an extension user cannot make further calls. (

1.8.2 Budget Management)

AOC for ISDN extension

An ISDN extension also receives AOC.

188 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Description

An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line.

Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis. The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature. There are the following types:

Type Description

Call Forwarding—

Unconditional (CFU)

Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally.

Call Forwarding—

Busy (CFB)

An incoming call is forwarded when the destination on the PBX is busy.

Call Forwarding—No

Reply (CFNR)

An incoming call is forwarded when the destination on the PBX does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.

When the CFB or CFNR has been set, the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once. When the CFU has been set, the network forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service.

[Example]

<FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-MP)>

ISDN

PBX

ISDN

MSN:123-4567

CFU

Destination: 01-23-4567

MSN: 123-4567

987-6543

PBX

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Extn. 1011

(MSN: 123-4567

Forward Destination

of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Feature Guide 189

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

Conditions

• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.

• The feature requires the MSN service. (

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)

Ringing Service)

• COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature.

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.5.1 Forwarding Calls

190 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Description

An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line.

The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set on the PBX as the forward destination of trunk calls; the network is instructed by the PBX. This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature.

Call Forwarding—Unconditional (CFU), Call Forwarding—Busy (CFB), and Call Forwarding—

No Reply (CFNR) are applied to this feature.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service.

[Example]

<FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-P)>

ISDN ISDN

Outside Caller

Dials "01-45-6789".

PBX

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Outside Caller

Dials "01-45-6789".

CF Request to 01-23-4567

PBX

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Extn. 1011

(DDI No.: 01-45-6789

Forward Destination

of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)

Extn. 1011

(DDI No.: 01-45-6789

Forward Destination

of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)

Conditions

• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.

• This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.

• This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call.

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Feature Guide 191

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

User Manual References

User Manual

1.5.1 Forwarding Calls

192 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Description

An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature. This can be a part of a Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN (

1.20.1.7 Call Transfer

(CT)—by ISDN) and Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN (

1.20.1.8 Three-party

Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN). This feature allows an ISDN call to be held, and a call to be

made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN. A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 141 Call Hold (HOLD) supplementary service.

Conditions

ISDN Hold Button

A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button.

• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.

• The TRS/Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature. (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))

• ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature. (

1.9.1 Automatic

Route Selection (ARS))

• It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

Feature Guide 193

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

Description

An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, without occupying a second ISDN line.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer (ECT) supplementary service.

Conditions

• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.

• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis.

• If an ISDN port is in P-P configuration, this feature can be used only when the network supports the "explicit linkage" option.

• Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible. (

1.11.1 Call Transfer)

• The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)

194 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

Description

During a conversation using an ISDN line, an extension user can add another party and establish a three-party conference call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 188 Three-Party (3PTY) supplementary service.

Conditions

• The availability of this feature is depending on the contract with the telephone company.

• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation

Feature Guide 195

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Description

An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up. Information on the malicious call will be received later on.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) supplementary service.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID])

196 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Description

If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line, an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that party’s number is automatically dialled.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) supplementary service.

Conditions

• This feature is available under the following conditions:

a)

The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network.

b)

The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.

• To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming.

• An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.

• The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds.

• If an extension user makes a call using the CCBS feature, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be used even though the extension has set CLIR or the extension has used the CLIP for the incoming call distribution group by pressing the ICD Group button when the CCBS has set. (

1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation

(CLIP/COLP))

• After using the CCBS feature, using Last Number Redial will not retrieve the number dialled by CCBS. (

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial)

• An extension user that has set the CCBS feature cannot receive callback ringing while the extension is holding a call.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

Feature Guide 197

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.11 ISDN Extension

Description

An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for either trunk or extension connection. When extension connection is enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 fax machine, personal computer) or a behind PBX can be connected to the port.

If the ISDN port is in point-to-point (P-P) configuration, one terminal device can be connected to the port. If the ISDN port is in point-to-multipoint (P-MP) configuration, a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously.

Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber

Number (MSN). The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit, 0 through 9 or 00 through 99.

[Example]

PBX

ISDN Port for

EXTN. (P-MP)

Extn. No.: 1234

ISDN Port for

EXTN. (P-MP)

(1234)

Extn. No.: 13X (MSN)

(1234)

Idle Extension

Hunting is available.

...

...

...

...

(1234)

(131) (132)

ISDN Port for

EXTN. (P-P/P-MP)

Extn. No.: 14XX (MSN)

ISDN Port for

EXTN. (P-P/P-MP)

Behind

PBX

Extn. No.: 15XX

(MSN)

(139)

...

(1400) (1401)

...

(1499)

1234:

Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port and receive a call simultaneously.

131–139:

Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port.

130:

All terminals receive a call simultaneously.

1400–1499:

Each terminal receives a call.

(Use the DDI/MSN feature of the behind PBX.)

Conditions

Subaddressing

Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices. The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly.

• Call Transfer (PBX feature) is available only for ISDN extensions in P-MP configuration.

(

1.11.1 Call Transfer)

198 Feature Guide

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group (

1.2.2 Incoming Call

Distribution Group Features) or idle extension hunting group (

1.2.1 Idle Extension

Hunting). In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

• If the last digit of the MSN is "0", all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously, if the specification of each terminal device is available. To use the

MSN whose last digit is "0" as an individual MSN, system programming is required for each ISDN port.

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Feature Guide 199

1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

1.20.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Description

ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol, and they may require a service access code to be dialled.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service

(ISDN Service Access).

Conditions

ISDN Service Button

A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button. A service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation.

• This feature is not available to an SLT.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)

200 Feature Guide

1.21 E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

1.21 E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

1.21.1 E1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Description

The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbps-voice channels at 2.048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).

1.

Channel Type

[DR2 (Digital System R2)/E & M-C (Continuous E & M)/E & M-P (Pulsed E & M)]

The E1 card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the three channel types can be assigned to one of the 30 channels of the

E1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs.

2.

E1 Features

The following table shows the features available for each channel type:

[Feature Table]

Channel Type (1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) ANI

(5) Call Charge

Information

DR2

*1

*2

E & M-C

E & M-P

*2

: Available

*1 :

Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC-R2.

*2 :

Available when this PBX is connected to the KX-TDA100, KX-TDA200, or KX-

TD500.

Feature Guide 201

1.21 E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

[Explanation]

Number in the table

(1)

Feature Description

TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (

1.28.1 TIE Line

Service)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Direct Inward

Dialling (DID)

Direct In Line

(DIL)

Automatic

Number

Identification

(ANI)

Call Charge

Information

Refer to the DID feature. (

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling

(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))

Refer to the DIL feature. (

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL))

Outgoing ANI:

Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line. The sending method is the same as ISDN CLIP service. (

1.20.1.2

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP))

Incoming ANI:

Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line.

When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number. (

1.17.1 Caller ID)

The call charge meter pulses can be received during a conversation. (

1.25.2 Charge Meter)

Conditions

• If an E1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.

• If "

MFC-R2

" is selected as the Dial Mode, the PBX always sends a dial tone, instead of the telephone company, when making a trunk call using E1 line.

202 Feature Guide

1.22 T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

1.22 T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

1.22.1 T1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Description

The T1 line carries twenty-four 64 kbps-voice channels at 1.5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).

1.

Channel Type

[LCOT/GCOT/DID/TIE/OPX]

The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the

T1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs.

2.

T1 Features

The following table shows the features available for each channel type:

[Feature Table]

Channel Type (1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) OPX (5) ANI

LCOT

GCOT

DID

TIE (E & M)

OPX

: Available

[Explanation]

Number in the Table

(1)

(2)

Feature Description

TIE Line

Service

Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (

1.28.1 TIE Line

Service)

Direct Inward

Dialling (DID)

Refer to the DID feature. (

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward

Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))

(3) Direct In Line

(DIL)

Refer to the DIL feature. (

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL))

Feature Guide 203

1.22 T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Number in the Table

(4)

Feature

Off Premise

Extension

(OPX)

Description

An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were installed locally. The SLT makes and receives a call through the PBX. An extension number can be given to the OPX, and extension data such as COS is also applied.

[Example]

Telephone Company

SLT

T1 LCOT T1 OPX

T1 Card

PBX

Extn.103

(5)

Dials "103".

Extn.101

Extn.102

Automatic

Number

Identification

(ANI)

Receives the caller’s number from the T1 line.

When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number. (

1.17.1 Caller ID)

Conditions

• If a T1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.

204 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

1.23 Voice Mail Features

1.23.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Description

A VPS can be connected to extension ports on the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM group. This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls.

1.

VM Group Type

Type

VM (DTMF) Group

VM (DPT) Group

Description

A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features. A maximum of two VM (DTMF) groups can be assigned.

A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration features.

With the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:

• A maximum of two VM (DPT) groups can be assigned.

• One Panasonic KX-TVS/KX-TVP system can be in only one group.

• A maximum of 12 ports (24 channels) of the VPS can form each group.

With the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30:

• One VM (DPT) group can be assigned.

• A maximum of 4 ports (8 channels) of the VPS can form a group.

[Example]

DPT

Port

SLT

Port

PBX

VM (DPT) Group

Floating extn. no. 100

Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

VM (DTMF) Group

Floating extn. no. 250

Extn.117 Extn.118 Extn.119 Extn.120

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

VPS

(DPT [Digital] Integration)

VPS

(DTMF Integration)

Feature Guide 205

1.23 Voice Mail Features

VM (DTMF) Group Assignment:

The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX. These SLT ports, as well as VM

(DTMF) Group settings, must be configured to allow DTMF Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM

(DTMF) Group].

VM (DPT) Group Assignment:

The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX. These DPT ports, as well as VM (DPT) group settings, must be configured to allow DPT (Digital) Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM

(DPT) Group].

*

3

3

:

6

6

5

:

4

4

:

5

[Programming Example of Extension Port]

Slot

1

2

:

1

2

:

1

2

1

2

:

Port

DPT

DPT

:

S-Hybrid

S-Hybrid

:

SLT

SLT

:

SLT

SLT

Port Type Extn. No.

101

102

:

201

202

:

301

302

:

401

402

Type*

VM (DPT)

VM (DPT)

:

VM (DPT)

VM (DPT)

:

Not assignable

Not assignable

:

Not assignable

Not assignable

DPT Property

Unit No.

of VPS

1

1

:

2

2

:

Not assignable

Not assignable

:

Not assignable

Not assignable

Port No.

of VPS

1

2

:

1

2

:

Not assignable

Not assignable

:

Not assignable

Not assignable

:

Terminal Device Assignment [601]

[Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group]

VM (DTMF)

Group No.

1

2

Floating

Extension

No.

300

400

Group

Name

Company C

Company D

Service

Mode

AA

VM

VM (DPT)

Group 1

VM (DPT)

Group 2

VM (DTMF)

Group 1

VM (DTMF)

Group 2

Extension No. of

Port Connected to

VPS Port

1

301

2

302

401 402 …

[Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group]

VM (DPT) Group No.

1

2

Floating Extension No.

100

200

*

*

:

VM Group Floating Extension Number [660]

Group Name

Company A

Company B

2.

Incoming Calls to VM Group

When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM port number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings

(

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)) for each extension port are

disregarded.

It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming. If the queuing is disabled through system programming, the

206 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

call will be redirected to the destination, assigned on the trunk group which receives the call, by the Intercept Routing feature.

Conditions

[General]

• It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g.,

FWD, Idle Extension Hunting) on the extension in the group.

The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the extension.

One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access

It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature.

(

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling) For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123)

of the VPS (extension number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialling button. When pressing this button, the outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard.

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

• All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card.

[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]

• All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to either the same DLC card, or to the preinstalled Super Hybrid ports.

Feature Guide References

1.23.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Feature Guide 207

1.23 Voice Mail Features

1.23.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Description

The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other. The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated

Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform the extension status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT.

The following answering services and features are available:

1.

Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode

When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox.

[Example]

The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for."

The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the

PBX.

The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike's voice mail.

I am sorry I cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back."

The caller leaves a message.

If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM (DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller-dialled number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number.

[Available Features for Follow on ID] a)

FWD to a Mailbox

b)

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

c)

Call Transfer to a Mailbox

d)

Listening to a Message in a Mailbox

2.

Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode

The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance.

3.

VM AA Service, AA VM Service

It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service or vice versa.

System Explanation

1.

Service Mode Assignment

Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to

208 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

correspond with the assignment of the VPS.

2.

DTMF Command Assignment

Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings.

Switching to VM

Switching to AA

Recording message

Listening message

Command (Default)

#6

#8

H

H

Note: H = Mailbox Number

3.

VM Service a)

FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number.

[FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection]

If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the

VPS.

It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox.

This can be performed by selecting "

AA

" through system programming.

Parameter

Answer by

Mailbox

(Default)

AA

None

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode

Switching to VM command +

Recording message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

Recording message command

(H [H = Mailbox No.])

Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)

(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)

b)

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number.

[Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection]

If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS.

It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by selecting "

AA

" through system programming.

Feature Guide 209

1.23 Voice Mail Features

Parameter

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode

Answer by

Mailbox

AA

Switching to VM command +

Recording message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

Recording message command

(H [H = Mailbox No.])

Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)

None (Default) (DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)

[Example of a) & b)]

Trunk Call

Operator

Transfer

PBX

Extn. 102

Sent "#6" + "102".

mailbox number

Switching to VM command

FWD, Intercept

VPS (In AA service mode)

VM Port 1 VM Port 2

VM (DTMF)

Group

VM Port X

VM Port 3

c)

Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. The extension user should use the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the

VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command (after the VPS answers the call).

Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.

210 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

[Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension

Number]

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode

Switching to VM command +

Recording message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

Recording message command

(H [H = Mailbox No.])

[Example]

Trunk Call

PBX

Sent "#6" + "103".

mailbox number

Switching to VM command

Transfer with VM Transfer button + extension number (103)

Extension

(Operator)

VPS (In AA service mode)

VM Port 1 VM Port 2

VM (DTMF)

Group

VM Port X

VM Port 3

d)

Listening to a Recorded Message

If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message button light) on the corresponding telephone as notification.

(

1.18.1 Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there

is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the

PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the Message button light). When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the

Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox.

Feature Guide 211

1.23 Voice Mail Features

[Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button]

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode

Switching to VM command +

Listening message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

Listening message command

( H [H = Mailbox No.])

[Example]

PBX

Sent "#6" + " ", "102".

Listening message command, mailbox number

Switching to VM command

Pressing the

MESSAGE button

Extn. 102

VPS (In AA service mode)

Mailbox for

Extn. 102

4.

AA Service

If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone).

Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings.

[The DTMF Status Signal and Condition]

Status

RBT (ringback tone)

Condition

The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension.

BT (busy tone) The called extension is busy.

ROT (reorder tone) The dialled number is invalid.

DND (DND tone) The called extension has set DND. (

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND))

Answer The called extension has answered the call.

FWD VM RBT

(FWD to Voice Mail ringback tone)

The called extension has set FWD to

VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.

FWD VM BT (FWD to Voice Mail busy tone)

The called extension has set FWD to

VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.

Default Command

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

212 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

Status

FWD EXT RBT

(FWD to extension ringback tone)

Condition

The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialled. FWD or Idle

Extension Hunting (

1.2.1 Idle

Extension Hunting) may be assigned by

the called extension.

Confirm

(confirmation tone)

The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has been successfully set or cancelled (e.g., Message Waiting) on the extension.

Disconnect The caller has hung up.

Default Command

8

9

#9

[Example]

PBX

2

Transfer

1

Busy

Extn.

102

3

Sent "2".

Busy

Status

4

VPS

1

An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS greets the caller: "Thank you for calling

Panasonic. If you know the extension number of the person you wish… ".

2

The caller dials the extension number (extn.

102). The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the PBX.

3

If the extension is not available, the PBX sends DTMF status signal of the extension

(busy status) to the VPS.

4

The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller: "Sorry. The extension is busy. Would you like to leave a message… ".

Conditions

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter.

• It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the

PBX sends the Follow on ID to the VPS.

• It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the

AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS.

• It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox Access ID).

• The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable.

• Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper recording. (

1.10.5 Data Line Security)

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Feature Guide 213

1.23 Voice Mail Features

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

1.11.1 Call Transfer

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

1.23.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

User Manual References

User Manual

1.9.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected

214 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Description

A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion.

DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX.

Feature Explanation

1.

Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup

The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically.

2.

FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding

extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.

3.

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS. (

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing) If the "

Intercept to Mailbox

" setting is enabled through system programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.

4.

Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. (

1.11.1 Call Transfer) The extension

user should use the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.

5.

Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS

If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time (

Transfer

Recall Time [201]), the PBX sends the mailbox number of the transfer destination

extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number. The "

Transfer Recall to Mailbox

" setting should be enabled through system programming to use this feature.

6.

Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access)

If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message button light) on the corresponding telephone as notification. (

1.18.1

Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message

waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox.

When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the

Feature Guide 215

1.23 Voice Mail Features

messages stored in his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox

Access). It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS.

7.

VPS Trunk Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call*

Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the

VPS trunk group number and time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant (

2.2.4

Time Service) assigned for the call to the VPS. Therefore the VPS can send the assigned

message (company greeting) to the caller. Corresponding VPS trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming trunk call as follows:

a)

DIL/TIE: the setting of each trunk port (

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL), 1.28.1 TIE

Line Service)

b)

DID/DDI: the setting of each location number for DID/DDI (

1.1.1.3 Direct

Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))

c)

MSN: the setting of each MSN (

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)

Ringing Service)

[Example]

For DID Calls:

Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.

[DID Programming Example]

Location

No.

DID No.

DID Destination

Day Lunch Break Night

DID Name

VPS Trunk

Group No.

Tenant

No.

0001

0002

:

123-4567 105

123-2468

:

102

:

100

100

:

105

102

:

100

100

:

John White

Tom Smith

:

1

2

:

1

3

:

216 Feature Guide

[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]

Trunk Group No.

1

2

:

Day

Lunch

Break

Night

Day

Lunch

Break

Night

:

Company Greeting No.

Incoming Call Service

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

:

Custom Service 11

Custom Service 29

Custom Service 31

Custom Service 12

Custom Service 21

Custom Service 15

Custom Service 42

Custom Service 30

:

Explanation:

A DID call reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature.

According to the [DID Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming

Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

Tenant 1

(Company A)

1.23 Voice Mail Features

Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number.

Trunk Call

Trunk Call

123-4567

123-2468

Sends the following information:

· VPS Trunk Group: 1

· Time mode: Day

PBX

Intercept

Sends the following information:

· VPS Trunk Group: 2

· Time mode: Night

Tenant 3

(Company B)

VPS

(Floating Extn. No.100)

Extn. 105 Extn. 102

8.

Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS

When receiving a trunk call, the PBX sends the caller’s identification number/name to the

VPS.

9.

DID Number Notification to the VPS

When receiving a trunk call with a DDI/DID number or an MSN, the PBX sends the DDI/

DID number or MSN to the VPS. The number will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by, for example, the Intercept Routing feature.

10.

Status Notification to the VPS

After the call is redirected by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension (e.g., busy) to the VPS.

11.

Paging by the VPS

The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message. (

1.14.1 Paging)

12.

Live Call Screening (LCS)

PT and PS users can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring can be carried out in two ways: each PT user can choose which through personal programming (Live Call Screening Mode Set). PS users cannot choose the way: only Private mode is available for them.

Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker.

Private mode: The user will hear an alarm tone. To monitor the call, the user goes offhook with the handset, MONITOR button, or SP-PHONE button. However, PS users cannot monitor the call with the speakerphone.

Feature Guide 217

1.23 Voice Mail Features

13.

Two-way Recording into the VPS

A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.

Use the Two-way Record button to record into his own mailbox. Use the Two-way Transfer button to record into someone else’s mailbox.

Note

When you record Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.

14.

VPS Data Control by the PBX*

The data of date and time is controlled by the PBX.

15.

Remote PBX Data Control by the VPS*

The FWD of an extension can be controlled by the VPS.

*: This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS.

Conditions

[General]

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter.

[Live Call Screening (LCS)]

• If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT, and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode, both the PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status. The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being recorded. The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off-hook. To intercept the call, press Flash/Recall button or flash the hookswitch. (

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone)

LCS Button

A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button.

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

To prevent unauthorised monitoring, it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension

PIN. This PIN will be required when setting LCS. (

1.26.1 Extension Personal

Identification Number (PIN)) If the user forgets the PIN, it can be cleared by an extension

assigned as the manager.

• Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set

[After Answering]).

• To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, LCS can only be turned on or off from the wired telephone. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, setting LCS on/off from the PS has no effect. (

1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

[Two-way Recording into the VPS]

Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An extension number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch record button for the mailbox of the specified extension. (One-

touch Two-way Transfer Button).

218 Feature Guide

1.23 Voice Mail Features

• When all of the VPS ports are busy:

a)

Pressing the Two-way Record button sends an alarm tone

b)

Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

1.23.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

User Manual References

User Manual

1.9.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

3.2.2 Manager Programming

Feature Guide 219

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

1.24.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Description

This PBX supports the connection of a PS (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690). It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT.

Conditions

• The PS registration is required through the system programming (

PS Registration

[690]). To avoid unexpected registration to another PBX, the Personal Identification

Number (PIN) for the PBX is necessary to register a PS (

Personal Identification

Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692]). The registration can be cancelled ( PS

Termination [691]).

Handover

Even if a PS user moves during a conversation, the PS will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call (Handover).

Handover is available in any of the following cases:

a)

During a conversation with an extension or outside party.

b)

While a call is ringing at the PS.

c)

While the PS is in idle status.

PBX

CS

Interface

CS

Handover:

Calls will not be disconnected.

CS

On the contrary, Handover is not available in one of the following cases:

a)

When the new (Handover) CS is busy.

b)

When there is no CS within range.

c)

While the Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (

1.23.3 Voice

Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).

d)

While the PS user is paging other extensions (

1.14.1 Paging).

e)

During a doorphone call (

1.16.1 Doorphone Call).

f)

While the PS user is dialling digits to make a trunk call.

g)

During a conversation with an extension using PC Console or PC Phone, to which the conversation is being recorded.

• When a caller has dialled the extension number of a PS but the CS is busy, the caller hears a busy tone.

220 Feature Guide

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Feature Guide 221

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

1.24.2 PS Ring Group

Description

PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple groups.

[Programming Example]

PS Ring

Group 01

Floating Extn. No.

Group Name

301

Sales 1

Incoming Trunk Call

Information Display

Called Party’s Name/

Number

PS01

PS02

PS03

PS04

PS05

PS06

PS07

:

:

: Constituent

PS Ring

Group 02

302

Sales 2

Caller’s Name/

Number

:

PS Ring

Group 03

303

Sales 3

Caller’s Name/

Number

:

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

:

· ·

· ·

· ·

· ·

PS Ring Group 1

(Floating Extn. No. 301

Name: Sales 1)

PS Ring Group 2

(Floating Extn. No. 302

Name: Sales 2)

PS01

PS02

PS03

PS04

PS05

PS06

Conditions

PS Ring Group

A maximum of 32 groups can be created.

Available PS

The KX-TD7580, KX-TD7590, KX-TCA155, KX-TCA255, KX-TD7680, and KX-TD7690 can join PS ring groups.

• Incoming trunk call information is shown on a PS display when a trunk call arrives at a PS ring group which the PS joins. The display information can be selected on a PS ring group

222 Feature Guide

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

basis through system programming: Called Party’s Name/Number or Caller’s Name/

Number.

Calling Multiple PSs Simultaneously

There are two methods to call multiple PSs simultaneously using the floating extension number assigned to the following groups:

Method Assignment Merit Demerit Details in

Incoming

Call

Distribution

Group

Assign all desired

PSs to one incoming call distribution group

(

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Member [620]), and

set the group call distribution method for the group to

"Ring".

All PS users in the group can use the

Log-in/Log-out feature, Wrap-up feature, and ICD

Group button for the group.

The CS may often be busy as each

PS in the group uses one channel when a call arrives at the group.

• 1.2.2

Incoming

Call

Distribution

Group

Features

PS Ring

Group

Assign all desired

PSs to one PS ring group.

Only one channel is used when a call arrives at the group.

PS users in the group cannot use the Log-in/Logout and Wrap-up features.

• When a PS joins a PS ring group, the following personal settings are disregarded:

a)

When the PS ring group is called:

– Delayed Ringing

– Display information when the incoming calls arrive;

The settings (e.g., display priority) are disregarded.

– The setting which is assigned on the PS (e.g., FWD)

– The status of the PS (e.g., busy)

b)

Log-in/log-out setting (from the PS ring group/from the incoming call distribution group which the PS ring group belongs to). (

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out)

Note

Log-in/log-out setting of the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded.

PS Ring Group

Log-out

Log-in

Feature Guide 223

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

PS Ring

Group

Log-out

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

Log-in

Log-out

Log-in

• When the PS ring group is called using the floating extension number, the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number. However, the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number.

• If a PS in a PS ring group has set the DND feature for trunk calls, the PS will not ring when an intercom call or a trunk call arrives at the PS ring group. (

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb

(DND))

• For calls directed to PS ring groups, the PBX will handle at most two calls simultaneously.

The third call cannot arrive at a PS ring group until one of the first two calls is answered or a caller hangs up.

224 Feature Guide

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

1.24.3 PS Directory

Description

A PS user can store numbers and/or names in the directory. A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in the directory.

Depending on the PS model, the PS user can use the following directories for easy operation:

Type

PS Dialling Directory

Description

Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers.

System Speed Dialling

Directory

Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names

(

System Speed Dialling Name [002]) and numbers (

System Speed Dialling Number [001]).

PBX Extension Dialling

Directory

Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension names (

Extension Name [004]).

Shortcut Directory

Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature names and numbers.

Quick Dialling

Makes a call or accesses a feature easily by selecting from a private directory of names and numbers.

Feature Guide 225

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

1.24.4 PS Feature Buttons

Description

A PS user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons (button + a specified number,

, or #) and/or display operation. The flexible buttons and the display are customised through

PS programming. The button assignment is the same for PT. (

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons).

Some special feature buttons (e.g., WAVESEARCH button) may be customised depending on the PS type.

226 Feature Guide

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Description

A PS can be used in parallel with a wired telephone (PT/SLT). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone. When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled, the two telephones share one extension number (main telephone’s extension number) like XDP Parallel mode for a DPT and an SLT.

PBX

Super

Hybrid

Port

Cell Station

XDP Parallel Mode

Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode

DPT

Wireless Phone

Extn. 102

PT/SLT

Extn. 103

PS

Conditions

• If one of the telephones goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the telephone going off-hook. However, the call is not switched in one of the following conditions:

a)

During a Conference call (

1.13.1 Conference Features).

b)

While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (

1.23.3 Voice Mail

DPT (Digital) Integration).

c)

While receiving OHCA (

1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)).

d)

While being monitored by another extension (

1.7.3 Call Monitor).

e)

During Consultation Hold.

f)

During a broadcasting call (

1.15.1 Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)).

(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)

• Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a PS. The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature through COS programming (

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired

Telephone [515]). Once this feature is set, the setting at the wired telephone cannot be

changed unless a PS changes the setting.

Feature Guide 227

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

• The following features are not available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the PS is on a call (however, they are available for the extensions in Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode while the wired telephone is on a call):

– Executive Busy Override

– Whisper OHCA (

1.7.4.4 Whisper OHCA)

– CCBS (

1.20.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS))

• Most of the extension data (e.g., extension number, extension name) of the wired telephone is used for its PS as well. However, the PS has its own extension data for the following:

– Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection (

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection)

– Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming (

1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming)

– Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing (

1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing)

– Hot Line Setting (

1.6.1.7 Hot Line)

– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park

– Display Language (

1.19.4 Display Information)

– ISDN Bearer Mode (

1.20.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—

SUMMARY)

– Flexible Button Assignment (

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons)

Note

To change the setting of the extension data above, the setting for the wired telephone or the PS must be changed individually. When changing the PS setting, use the PS’s original extension number (not the main telephone’s extension number), if required.

• When the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode has been set, the following extension data for the wired telephone is copied to the PBX extension data for the PS and the extension data remains there even when the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is cancelled.

– Call Waiting Setting (

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting)

– FWD/DND Setting (

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))

– Call Pickup Deny Setting (

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)

– Executive Busy Override Deny Setting

– Itemised Billing Code for ARS (

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))

– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park

– CLIP/COLP Number (

CLIP/COLP Number [606])

– CLIP/COLP Number Selection

– CLIR Setting

– COLR Setting

– Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) (

Extension Personal

Identification Number (PIN) [005]) (

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification

Number (PIN))

– COS Programming (

Class of Service [602]) (

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS))

– User Group (

User Group [603]) (

2.2.2 Group)

• If the Extension Feature Clear is performed, the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone and the PS will be cleared. (

1.26.2 Extension Feature Clear)

• When a call arrives, both the wired telephone and the PS ring. However, in the following cases only the person who made the setting will receive ringing:

– Automatic Callback Busy

228 Feature Guide

1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features

– Transfer Recall, Hold Recall (

1.12.1 Call Hold), and Call Park Recall

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

1.7.2 Executive Busy Override

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

1.11.1 Call Transfer

1.12.2 Call Park

1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

Feature Guide 229

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Description

Automatically records detailed information for each extension.

1.

SMDR Output Port

The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output the SMDR data.

The following devices can be connected:

Serial Interface (RS-232C) port: Personal computer (PC), printer, etc.

2.

SMDR Output Data

The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port:

a)

Trunk call information (incoming/outgoing)

b)

Intercom call information (outgoing)

c)

Log-in/Log-out information

d)

PBX error log (

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information)

Memory for SMDR: A specified number of call information can be memorised for each

PBX. If more calls are originated or received, the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one.

230 Feature Guide

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

3.

SMDR Format Type and Contents

There are the following three types of output format which can be selected through system programming:

Pattern A: 80 digits without call charge information

Date

(8 digits)

Time

(7)

Ext

(4)

CO

(2)

Dial Number

(25)

01/02/02 10:03AM

01/02/02 10:07AM

01/02/02 10:15AM

01/02/02 10:30AM

1200

1200

1200

*123

01

01

01

01

<I>12345678901234567890

<I>

1234567890123456

1234567890123456

Ring

(4)

Duration

(8)

ACC Code

(10)

CD

(3)

5'15

0'05

00:00'00

00:01'05

00:01'05

00:01'05

NA

9876543210

9876543210

9876543210

TR

01/02/02 01:07PM

01/02/02 01:07PM

01/02/02 01:07PM

01/02/02 01:07PM

01/02/02 01:07PM

1234

1234

1234

1234

1234

01

01

01

01

01

<I>ABC COMPANY12345678

<D>CDE9876<I>Q COMPANY

ABC COMPANY12345678

123..............

123456XX

0'05

0'05

00:01'05

00:01'05

00:01'05

00:01'05

00:12'05

9876543210

9876543210

98765

01/02/02 08:33AM

01/02/02 01:07PM

01/02/02 03:35PM

01/02/02 03:45PM

1234

1234

1234

1234

In the office

LOG IN

LOG OUT

EXT12355

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Pattern B: 80 digits with call charge information

(6) (7) (8) (9)

Date Time

(8 digits) (7)

Ext

(4)

CO

(2)

Dial Number

(20)

Duration

(8)

Cost

(8+2)

ACC Code

(10)

CD

(3)

01/02/02 10:03AM

01/02/02 10:07AM

1210

2005

01

01

<I>

12345678901234567890 00:00'05 00560.00EU

9876543210

NA

(1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

(7) (10) (8) (9)

Pattern C: 120 digits

Date

(8 digits)

Time

(7)

Ext

(4)

CO

(4)

Dial Number

(50)

Ring

(4)

Duration

(8)

Cost

(8+3)

ACC Code

(10)

CD

(3)

01/02/02 10:03AM

01/02/02 10:07AM

1230

1230

0001

0001

123456789012345678901234567890

<I>ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0'05

00:00'05

00:00'05

00560.00EUR

9876543210

9876543210

TR

TR

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6) (7) (10) (8) (9)

Feature Guide 231

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

[Explanation]

The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples. For the programmable items, refer to the following

[Programmable Items].

Number in the

Pattern

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Date

Time

Item Description

Shows the date of the call.

Shows the end time of a call as Hour/Minute/AM or PM.

Ext

(Extension)

CO (Trunk)

Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc., which was engaged in the call.

Also shows the following codes:

Dxxx: Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone

(xxx=doorphone number) (

1.16.1 Doorphone Call)

Txxx: Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service (xxx=trunk group number)

*xxx: Verified call (xxx=verified code) (

1.8.6 Verified

Code Entry)

Shows the trunk number used for the call.

For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred.

Dial Number [Trunk Call]

Outgoing Trunk Call

Shows the dialled telephone number.

Valid digits are as follows:

0 through 9, , #

P: Pause

F: EFA signal

=: A Host PBX Access code (

1.5.4.7 Host PBX Access

Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a

Host PBX))

. (dot): Secret dialling

X: Privacy dial

–: Transferred call

If the transfer destination extension enters some digits, the entered digits will be added after "–".

(6) Ring

Incoming Trunk Call

Shows <I> + the caller’s identification name/number.

It is also possible to show the DDI/DID/MSN call information. In this case, <D> + DDI/DID/MSN name/number is added before <I> .

[Outgoing Intercom Call]

Shows the dialled extension number followed by "EXT".

[Log-in/Log-out]

Shows the log-in or log-out status.

Shows the ring duration before answering a call in

Minutes/Seconds.

232 Feature Guide

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

Number in the

Pattern

(7)

Item

Duration

(8)

(9)

(10)

Acc Code

(Account

Code)

CD

(Condition

Code)

Cost

Description

Shows the duration of the trunk call in Hours/Minutes/

Seconds.

Shows the account code appended to the call. (

1.5.4.3

Account Code Entry)

Shows other call information with the following codes:

CL: Collect call

TR: Transfer

FW: FWD to trunk

D0: Call using DISA or TIE line service

RM: Remote maintenance (modem) (

2.3.1 PC

Programming)

NA: Not answered call

RC: Received call

AN: Answered call

Shows the call charge.

[Programmable Items]

Item Description

Outgoing trunk call

Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown. This setting is common throughout the PBX (

SMDR Outgoing

Call Printing [804]). COS programming is also required.

Incoming trunk call

Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown (

SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805]).

Outgoing intercom call

Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded.

Log-in/Log-out status

ARS dial

Controls whether the log-in/log-out status is recorded.

Controls whether the user-dialled number or the modified number is shown.

The Host PBX Access code ("=" followed by the access code) can be shown (as supplementary information) only when the modified number is selected in this setting. (

1.9.1 Automatic

Route Selection (ARS))

Caller’s identification

DID/DDI number

Controls whether the caller’s identification number, name, number and name, or nothing is shown. If " none

" is selected,

<I> will not be shown.

Controls whether the DID/DDI number, name, number and name, or nothing is shown. If " none

" is selected, <D> will not be shown.

Feature Guide 233

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

Item

Secret dialling

Privacy dial

Date order

Received call

Answered call

Description

Controls secret dialling. If enabled, the dialled number will be shown as dots.

This setting is effective only when the modified number is selected in ARS dial setting above. If the user-dialled number is selected in ARS dial setting, the dialled number will be shown as dots regardless of this setting.

Enables or disables privacy dial. If enabled, the last four digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as "X". (e.g., 123-456-XXXX)

The date order is changeable: month/day/year, day/month/ year, year/month/day, year/day/month.

Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is shown.

Controls whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is shown.

Conditions

SMDR Format

The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer:

a)

Page Length: determines the number of lines per page (

SMDR Page Length

[802]).

b)

Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page (

SMDR Skip Perforation [803]).

The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.

Explanation:

Page

Length

Skip

Perforation

Machine

Perforation

• The SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset.

• If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be recorded on the SMDR.

• The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR:

– Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation

– Trunk-to-trunk calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (recording each as "incoming call" and "outgoing call")

234 Feature Guide

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period (

Call Duration Count Starting Time for

LCOT [208]) between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk

calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the PBX starts counting the call. A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call.

The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR.

If the reverse signal detection has been set (

1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit), the PBX will start

counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer.

Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters

The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-

232C) port (

RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800], RS-232C Parameter—Baud

Rate [800], RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800], RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit

[800], RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800]).

a)

New Line Code: Select the code for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "

CR.

" If not, select "

CR+LF.

"

b)

Baud Rate: A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the PC or printer.

c)

Word Length: A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.

d)

Parity Bit: A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.

e)

Stop Bit Length: A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out

1.11.1 Call Transfer

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

1.28.1 TIE Line Service

Feature Guide 235

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

1.25.2 Charge Meter

Description

The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party. The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and the SMDR.

1.

Call Charge Signal Service

Call charge signal service from the telephone company depends on the trunk being used.

Trunk

Analogue trunk

ISDN line

E1 line

Service

Pay Tone (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)*

Advice of Charge (AOC) (

1.20.1.3 Advice of

Charge (AOC))

Meter Pulse (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

*: When the pay tone service is used, pay tone type (12 kHz/16 kHz) should be selected (

Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)).

2.

Call Charge Display

– Up to 7 digits (e.g., 88888.75)

– The decimal point position (the number of significant decimal digits) for currency is programmable. (

Decimal Point Position for Currency [130])

– Up to 3 currency characters are programmable. (e.g., EUR or for Euro) (

Currency [131]).

– The currency position either front or back of the call charge is programmable. (e.g.,

45.12 or 45.12 )

3.

Margin/Tax Rate Assignment

It is possible to add a margin (

Charge Margin [010]) and the tax ( Charge Tax [011])

to the call charges. The call charge rate per meter indication is programmable on a trunk group basis (

Charge Rate per Unit [012]).

[Calculation Method]

The margin or tax rate must be xx.xx % (whole number part: two digits, decimal fraction: two digits). A calculation method depends on the information which is sent from the telephone company: meter indication or charge.

a)

Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication:

[Meter indication received from the telephone company] [Call Charge Rate]

[1 – Tax Rate] [1 – Margin Rate]

b)

Call charge with tax and margin in charge:

[Charge received from the telephone company] [Call Charge Rate]

[1 – Tax Rate] [1 – Margin Rate]

The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit.

236 Feature Guide

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

4.

Total Call Charge

– A PT user can show the total call charges on the display.

– The call charge is totalled on an extension, trunk, or verified code basis.

– The call charge on a verified code is not totalled for each extension.

5.

Budget Management

It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verified code. For example, an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for the telephone usage. If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further trunk calls. An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge (

1.8.2 Budget Management).

6.

Call Charge Management

A manager can use the following call charge management features in manager programming mode:

a)

Call Charge Fee Reference and Clear, for Each Extension/Verified Code

b)

Call Charge Fee Reference for Each Trunk

c)

Call Charge Rate Set for Each Trunk Group

d)

All Clear

e)

Call Charge Fee Print Out

f)

Budget Management for Each Extension/Verified Code.

[Examples of Call Charge Fee Reference]

******************************************************

* Charge Meter Print Out - Total & All CO *

******************************************************

Total Charge: 00175.95

CO Line

001: 00194.00

002: 00073.00

003: 00161.00

004: 00033.00

*******************************************************

* Charge Meter Print Out - All Extensions *

*******************************************************

Extension & Verified Code

*775: 00194.00

*102: 00073.00

*776: 00161.00

104: 00194.00

105: 00073.00

106: 00161.00

(Verified Code)

107: 00033.00

Note: *XXX: Call Charge Fee Reference for a verified code (XXX = verified code)

Feature Guide 237

1.25 Administrative Information Output Features

Conditions

[General]

Call Charge Fee Reference by Charge Reference Button

A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the

Charge Reference button. A flexible button can be customised as the Charge Reference button.

[Pay Tone Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)]

• It is possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company.

• It is possible to enable the PBX to send the flash/recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation (in on-hook status) to receive the call charge information.

Feature Guide References

1.8.6 Verified Code Entry

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

3.2.2 Manager Programming

238 Feature Guide

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Description

Each extension user can have his own PIN through system programming (

Extension

Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005]) or personal programming (Extension PIN

[Personal Identification Number]) to set features or access his own telephone remotely.

The following features cannot be used without the PIN:

a)

Live Call Screening (LCS)* (

1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)

b)

Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock (

1.17.2 Incoming Call Log),

Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock (

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System)

c)

Walking Extension (

1.26.3 Walking Extension)

d)

Extension Lock (

1.8.3 Extension Lock)

e)

Remote Extension Control (

1.26.5 Remote Extension Control by User) and

Walking COS (

1.8.5 Walking COS)

f)

Remote Extension Control and Walking COS using DISA (

1.16.6 Direct Inward

System Access (DISA))

*: If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN, this feature cannot be used without the PIN.

Conditions

WARNING

When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)

Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.

b)

Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.

c)

Change the PIN frequently.

Extension PIN Lock

If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN against the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.

This feature is also known as Station Password Lock.

Remote Extension PIN Clear

If an extension user forgets his PIN, a manager can clear the PIN. Then the extension user can assign a new PIN.

Extension PIN Display

It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming. By default, it is shown as dots.

Feature Guide 239

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode

3.2.2 Manager Programming

240 Feature Guide

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

1.26.2 Extension Feature Clear

Description

Extension users can clear all the following features set on their own telephone at once:

Absent Message

BGM

FWD*/DND*

Call Pickup Deny

Call Waiting*

Features

Data Line Security

Executive Busy Override Deny

Log-in/Log-out

Message Waiting

Paging Deny

Parallelled Telephone

Hot Line*

Timed Reminder

After Setting

Off

Off

Off

Allow

Disable (In Canada, the default setting is

"Enable" [Call Waiting tone].)

Off

Allow

Log-in

All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.

Allow

Paired SLT will ring.

Off

Cleared

Note: The features with "*" can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature.

This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear.

Conditions

• Extension Lock (

1.8.3 Extension Lock) and the extension personal identification

number (PIN) (

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)) will not be

cleared by this feature.

For Users in Canada only

If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear:

After performing Extension Feature Clear, Call Waiting will be enabled if "

Extension

Clear: Call Waiting

" is set to "

Clear

" through system programming. In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when going off-hook. (

1.27.1 Dial Tone)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.13 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)

Feature Guide 241

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

1.26.3 Walking Extension

Description

It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you. Settings such as extension number, one-touch dialling memory, and COS are all available to you at the new location.

[Example] This feature is useful when;

• Moving location

• There is no specific desk for your use.

This feature is also known as Walking Station.

Conditions

• This feature is available by switching the telephone between PT and PT, SLT and SLT, PT and SLT. Moving across the tenants is also possible.

• The incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location.

• An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))

• If a DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the

PT after the Walking Extension has been done, the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired extension through system programming (

Console Paired

Telephone [007]).

User Manual References

User Manual

1.10.1 Using the Same Settings as Your Previous Extension (Walking Extension)

242 Feature Guide

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

1.26.4 Timed Reminder

Description

Each extension user can set an alarm for any time as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, he hears special dial tone. If a voice message is used, he hears a prerecorded voice message.

Conditions

• Be sure that the PBX clock works.

• Setting a new time clears the previous time.

Programmable Time

The Alarm Ringing Duration time, the number of alarm repeat times, and intervals are programmable through system programming.

To use the voice message feature:

The MSG card is required and the message must be recorded. An extension assigned as the manager can record messages. (

1.16.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)) The different

message can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

2.2.4 Time

Service).

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.6.5 MSG4 Card

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.4 MSG2 Card

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)

Feature Guide 243

1.26 Extension Controlling Features

1.26.5 Remote Extension Control by User

Description

A user can remotely change the feature settings (e.g., FWD) and time service mode for his own extension from inside or outside the PBX using DISA (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access

(DISA)). This feature can be used only on the extensions which are allowed to be controlled

remotely on a COS basis.

The following features are available:

a)

FWD/DND (

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))

b)

Log-in/Log-out (

1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out)

c)

Absent Message (

1.18.2 Absent Message)

d)

Extension Lock (

1.8.3 Extension Lock)

e)

Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

2.2.4 Time

Service)

This feature is also known as Remote Station Control by User.

Conditions

Extension PIN

An extension personal identification number (PIN) (

Extension Personal Identification

Number (PIN) [005]) is required to use this feature. (

1.26.1 Extension Personal

Identification Number (PIN)) If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be

disconnected.

• Remote operation is not available for the extensions in the Internal Call Block mode. (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block)

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)

244 Feature Guide

1.27 Audible Tone Features

1.27 Audible Tone Features

1.27.1 Dial Tone

Description

The following dial tones inform extensions about features activated on the extensions:

Each dial tone type has two frequencies (e.g., dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B).

Type

Tone 1A/1B

Tone 2A/2B

Tone 3A/3B

Tone 4A/4B

Description

A normal dial tone is heard when:

a) No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set, or

b) ARS is used.

Any one of the features below is set.

• Absent Message

• BGM

• FWD

• Call Pickup Deny

• Call Waiting

• DND

• Extension Lock

• Executive Busy Override Deny

• Hot Line

• Timed Reminder

While a called PS is being searched, or any one of the features below is performed.

• Account Code Entry

• Consultation Hold

• Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message

Messages are waiting for the extension.

Conditions

Dial Tone Type A/B

It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4. If "

Type A

" is selected, all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A.

The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "

Type A

" is selected for the ARS, dial tone 1A will be heard. If "

Type B

" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard.

Distinctive Dial tone

Distinctive dial tone mode can be disabled. In this case, dial tone 1 will be sent.

Dial Tone Patterns

All dial tone patterns have a default (

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).

• Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM (DPT/DTMF) group. (

1.23.1 Voice

Mail (VM) Group)

Feature Guide 245

1.27 Audible Tone Features

1.27.2 Confirmation Tone

Description

At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users.

Type

Tone 1

Tone 2

Tone 3-1

Tone 3-2

Tone 4-1

Tone 4-2

Tone 5

Description

a) Sent when the setting is accepted.

b) Sent when a call is received in voice-calling mode (Alternate

Receiving—Ring/Voice). The caller’s voice will be heard after the tone.

a) Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged.

b) Sent when a call is received in Hands-free Answerback mode.

a) Sent before a conversation is established when using the

Paging feature.

b) Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation:

• Hands-free Answerback mode

• Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice)

Sent just before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers:

• Call Park Retrieve

• Call Pickup

• Hold Retrieve

• Paging Answer

• TAFAS

Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call.

(e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release,

Two-way Record.)

Sent when moving from a three-party call to a two-party call.

(e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release,

Two-way Record.)

Sent when a call is placed on hold (including Consultation Hold).

Conditions

Confirmation Tone Patterns

All confirmation tone patterns have a default (

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).

• It is possible to eliminate each tone.

246 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.1 TIE Line Service

Description

A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system (PBX or telephone company). By using TIE lines, the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included.

Interface

The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network:

Interface Network Type

E & M

Analogue

T1 (TIE [E & M])

Digital (64 kbps

×

24 channels)

E1 (E & M)

Digital (64 kbps

×

30 channels)

BRI/PRI (QSIG)

Digital (ISDN 2B+D/30B+D/23B+D)

VoIP

Internet Protocol (IP)

A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned "

Private

" as the networking type. (

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY)

Explanation

1.

Making a TIE Line Call

One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call.

a)

Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)

Dial the [Extension Number] only.

Feature Guide 247

1.28 Networking Features

[Example]

PBX-1

Interface

PBX-2

TIE Line

Interface Interface

TIE Line

PBX-3

Interface

Extn.1011

Extn.1012

Extn. 2011 Extn. 3011

Dials "3011".

Dials "2011".

Explanation:

To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX (e.g., 10XX for PBX-1, 20XX for PBX-2) to avoid having the same extension number.

Case 1:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2011".

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "2011" of PBX-2.

Case 2:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials extension number "3011".

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "3011" of PBX-3.

b)

PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

Dial the [TIE Line Access Number] + [PBX Code] + [Extension Number].

[Example]

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

PBX-3

PBX Code 953

Interface

TIE Line

Interface Interface

TIE Line

Interface

Extn.1011

Extn.1012

Dials "7-953-1011".

Dials "7-952-1011".

[PBX code]

[TIE line

access no.]

[Extn. no.]

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011

248 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

Explanation:

To use this method, it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension.

Case 1:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011".

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "1011" of PBX-2.

Case 2:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "953", and extension number "1011".

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "1011" of PBX-3.

2.

TIE Line Routing and Modification Table

2.1 To Make a TIE Line Call

The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call.

It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network.

The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number.

There are two system programmes for the tables:

TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the leading numbers (PBX code or extension number) and trunk group hunt sequence.

TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits/Added Number: used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call. This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration.

[Programming Examples]

Your PBX is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network. To identify the trunk route as illustrated, you should make the following tables.

a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)

TIE Line Network

PBX-4

PBX-3

Extn. 4xxx

TRG 2 b-2nd) 3xxx c) 4xxx

If you dial: a) 2xxx b) 3xxx c) 4xxx

(2, 3, 4: Other PBX

Extension Number

[TIE] in the Flexible

Numbering Plan)

Extn. 1xxx

PBX-1

TRG 1 a) 2xxx b-1st) 3xxx

Extn. 3xxx

PBX-2

Extn. 2xxx

Feature Guide 249

1.28 Networking Features

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]

Priority 1 Priority 2 . .

Location

No.

Leading

No.

Trunk

Group

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

Trunk

Group

Dial Modification . .

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

. .

01

02

03

:

2

3

4

:

1

1

2

:

0

0

0

: :

2

:

0

: :

. .

:

. .

. .

Explanation:

Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [2XXX]:

The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 2XXX

Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [3XXX]:

The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 3XXX

The 2nd route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 3XXX

Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [4XXX]:

The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 4XXX

b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

TIE Line Network

PBX-4

PBX Code 954

PBX-3

PBX Code 953

Extn. xxxx

Extn. xxxx

If you dial: a) 7-952-xxxx b) 7-953-xxxx c) 7-954-xxxx

(7: TIE Line Access

Number in the

Flexible

Numbering Plan)

TRG 2 b-2nd) 953#-xxxx c) 954#-xxxx

Extn. 1xxx

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

TRG 1 a) 952-xxxx b-1st) 953-xxxx

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Extn. xxxx

250 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]

Priority 1 Priority 2 . .

Location

No.

Leading

No.

Trunk

Group

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

Dial Modification . .

Trunk

Group

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

. .

01 952 1 0 . .

02

03

953

954

1

2

0

3

2 3

953# . .

. .

: : : :

954#

: : : : :

Explanation:

Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 952+XXXX]:

The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1

Sending no. to PBX-2: 952–XXXX

Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 953+XXXX]:

The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1

Sending no. to PBX-2: 953–XXXX

The 2nd route — trunk group (TRG) 2

Sending no. to PBX-4: 953#–XXXX

Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 954+XXXX]:

The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 2

Sending no. to PBX-4: 954#–XXXX

Feature Guide 251

1.28 Networking Features

2.2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)

[Example]

PBX-4

Extn. 1011

Dials "3011".

PBX-1

TIE Line Network

1 3011

PBX-3

PBX-2

3

Extn. 3011

2 3011

Extn. 2011

1

A TIE line call is sent to PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the number sent from PBX-1 is an extension number of PBX-2 (e.g., 2011), the call will be received at extension "2011". If not, PBX-2 checks the number in the TIE

Line Routing and Modified

Table of PBX-2.

2

If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX

(PBX-3).

3

The number sent from PBX-2

"3011" is an extension number of PBX-3. The call is received at extension "3011".

Note

When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number is an extension number of the PBX.

252 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

[Example]

PBX-4

PBX Code 954

TIE Line Network

Extn. 1011

Dials "7-953-1011".

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

1

953-1011

PBX-3

PBX Code 953

3

Extn. 1011

2

953-1011

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Extn. 1011

1

A TIE line call is sent to PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the number sent from PBX-1 has the PBX code of PBX-2 "952", the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX-2 (e.g.,

1011of PBX-2). If not, PBX-2 checks the number in the TIE

Line Routing and Modified

Table of PBX-2.

2

If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX

(PBX-3).

3

The number sent from PBX-2

"953-1011" has the PBX code of PBX-3 "953". The call is received at extension "1011" of

PBX-3.

Note

When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX.

3.

TIE Line and Trunk Connection

To connect the TIE line with the trunk, the following patterns are available:

1) Trunk-to-TIE Access

2) TIE-to-Trunk Access

3) Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access

3.1 Trunk-to-TIE Access

It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX.

Feature Guide 253

1.28 Networking Features a) Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment

[Example]

Trunk

Telephone Company

Trunk

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

DID No: 123-4567

Destination: 2011

Interface

TIE Line

PBX-2

Interface

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Extn. 1011

Extn. 2011

(DID No.:123-4567)

Explanation:

An outside caller dials the DID number "123-4567". The call is sent to extension

"2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID call destination (

DID Destination [453]) of PBX-1. (

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward

Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))

b) FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the TIE Line

[Example]

Telephone Company

Trunk

PBX-1

Trunk

TIE Line Network

TIE Line

Interface

PBX-2

Interface

Forwarded/Transferred

/Intercepted to 2011

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Extn. 1011

(DID No.: 123-4567)

Extn. 2011

254 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

Explanation:

An outside caller dials the DID number "123-4567". The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-1), and the call is forwarded, transferred, or intercepted to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line.

3.2 TIE-to-Trunk Access

The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines.

a) Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by Making a TIE Line Call Method

[Example]

<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

Trunk

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

9-01-23-4567

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

Interface

01-23-4567

Trunk

Extn. 1011

Dials "802-9-01-23-4567".

Extn. 2011

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Explanation:

1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567".

2. PBX-1 sends the call to PBX-2 through the trunk group (TRG) 2 (TIE line).

3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".

Feature Guide 255

1.28 Networking Features

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

Trunk

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

952-9-01-23-4567

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

Interface

01-23-4567

Trunk

Extn. 1011

Dials "7-952-9-01-23-4567" or

"802-952-9-01-23-4567".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Explanation:

1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code

"952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-

4567"; or dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2

"9", and telephone number "01-23-4567".

2. The call is connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952".

256 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features b) Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by the ARS feature

[Example]

<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

Trunk

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

9-01-23-4567

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

Interface

01-23-4567

Trunk

Extn. 1011

Dials "9-01-23-4567".

Extn. 2011

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Explanation:

1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "01-23-4567".

2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".

Feature Guide 257

1.28 Networking Features

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

Trunk

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

952-9-01-23-4567

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

Interface

01-23-4567

Trunk

Extn. 1011

Dials "9-01-23-4567".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Explanation:

1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "01-23-4567".

2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-

2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".

258 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features c) Blocking of Trunk Call through Other PBXs and How to Override It

To prohibit a TIE line call to go through PBX-2 for making a trunk call, if PBX-2 is Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX (e.g., KX-TDA100 or KX-TDA200), PBX-2 should disable the trunk group of the outgoing call from PBX-2 against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to PBX-2 (

Trunk Group Number [500]) like

the programming example shown below. TRS/Barring applies to a TIE line call on a COS of the trunk group of the incoming call basis. To override this prohibition, access the DISA floating extension number of PBX-2 and enter a verified code to change the COS temporarily.

[Programming Example of PBX-2]

Trunk Group No.

1

2

3

:

COS No.

3

2

2

:

TRG of Incoming

Call

TRG 1

COS 1

COS 2

COS 3

: :

Outgoing Call

TRG 2 TRG 3

: :

: Block

:

Feature Guide 259

1.28 Networking Features

[Example]

Telephone Company

Trunk

Trunk

TIE Line Network

01-23-4567

TRG 3

of PBX-2

PBX-1

PBX-Code 951

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2 of PBX-1

PBX-2

PBX-Code 952

952-9-01-23-4567

TRG 1 (COS 3)

of PBX-2

Interface DISA

952-(DISA Floating extn. no. + verified code entry feature no. + + verified code + verified code

PIN)-9-01-23-4567

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012

Dials "7-952-9-01-

23-4567".

Dials "7-952-(DISA Floating extn. no. + verified code entry feature no. + + verified code + verified code PIN)

-9-01-23-4567".

Explanation:

Case 1:

1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code

"952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-

4567".

2. The call is not connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" due to the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX-2.

Case 2:

1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code

"952", "DISA floating extension number of PBX-2 + verified code entry feature number + + verified code + verified code personal identification number (PIN)", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number

"01-23-4567".

2. The call overrides the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX-2, and the call is connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has

PBX code "952".

260 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features d) FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the Trunk

[Example]

Telephone Company

Trunk

PBX-1

PBX-Code 951

TIE Line Network

952-1011

TIE Line

Interface

PBX-2

PBX-Code 952

Interface

Forwarded/Transferred/

Intercepted to 01-23-4567

Trunk

Extn. 1011

Dials "7-952-1011".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Explanation:

1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code

"952", and extension number "1011".

2. The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-2) through the TIE line, and the call is forwarded, transferred or intercepted to the outside party

"01-23-4567" through the trunk.

Feature Guide 261

1.28 Networking Features

3.3 Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access

An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature.

[Example]

Telephone Company

Trunk

Outside Caller

Dials "(DISA phone number)-9-01-23-

4567".

Trunk Trunk

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX-Code 951

952-9-01-23-4567

DISA Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

PBX-Code 952

Interface

01-23-

4567

Trunk

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011

Explanation:

1. The outside caller dials the "DISA phone number of PBX-1", Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567".

2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-

2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".

262 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

4.

TIE Line Routing Flowchart

[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension]

A TIE line call is made as follows:

PBX Code Method: 7-abc-xxxx

Extension No. Method: dexx

Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no. or an other PBX extension no. in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX?

No

A

Yes:

TIE line access no.: 7

Other PBX extension no.: de

Is the leading number (abc or de) found in the TIE Line

Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX?

Yes

No

Selects the corresponding trunk group, and the dialled number is modified if a removed number of digits and/or added number is assigned.

Not treated as a TIE line call.

Reorder tone

Is the trunk group available?

Yes

Is there an idle trunk in the trunk group?

Yes

Routes to other PBX or trunk.

No

No

Reorder tone

Busy tone

Feature Guide 263

1.28 Networking Features

[Receiving a Call through a TIE Line]

<Extension Number Method

(Access without PBX Code)>

A call is received through a

TIE line as follows:

# 1021

The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port.

Removed number of digits: 1

Added number: None

Received number: # 1021

Modified number: # 1021=1021

Remove the first 1 digit.

<PBX Code Method

(Access with PBX Code)>

A call is received through a

TIE line as follows:

## 0511033

The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port.

Removed number of digits: 3

Added number: 9

Received number: ## 0511033

Modified number: ##0511033= 9511033

1) Remove the first 3 digits.

2) Add "9".

Does the modified number have the own PBX code "951"?

No

1021

Yes: 9511033

Goes to

A

Removes the own PBX code "951".

1033 flowchart of [Making a TIE Line Call from an

Extension].)

Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX

.

Operator Call No.

Directs the call to the operator.

No

Extension No.

of the Own PBX

Does the corresponding extension exist?

Yes

Is the corresponding extension idle?

Yes

Calls the extension.

No

Extension No.

of Other PBX

Goes to

A

Idle Line

Access No.

or

Trunk Group

Access No.

[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension].)

Is the trunk

group of the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX?

Others

Reorder tone.

No

Reorder tone

Sends reorder tone, or sends the call to the operator

(Intercept Routing

—No Destination).

Yes

TRS/Barring applies.

Call Waiting

Busy tone

Intercept Routing

—Busy/DND

Sends the call to the trunk.

264 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

Conditions

• When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting, the caller will hear a busy tone. If required, Intercept Routing—Busy/DND can be activated.

• The Inter-digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls.

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

1.11.1 Call Transfer

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.1 Basic Calling

Feature Guide 265

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Description

Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line. There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company. Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line.

Public/Private Discrimination: a)

When making a call: The public/private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company. The public/private discrimination number can be dialled manually, or automatically by ARS programming

(

1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) and/or TIE line service programming.

b)

When receiving a call: The telephone company distinguishes the call type. If it is a private call, the call is received by the TIE line service method. If it is a public call, the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call Distribution method (DIL/DDI/MSN) which is assigned on the trunk.

[Example]

Public ISDN

<Public

Discrimination>

9-0-01-23-4567

Public No.

VPN

PBX-1

PBX Code 111

Head

Office

<Private

Discrimination>

113-401

Private No.

PBX-2

PBX Code 112

Branch

Office

01-23-4567

PBX-3

PBX Code 113

Branch

Office

Dials

"01-45-6789".

Extn. 201 Extn. 202

Dials "9-01-23-4567".

(ARS)

Dials "401".

(TIE)

Extn. 301 Extn. 302

(DDI No.:

01-45-6789)

Extn. 401 Extn. 402

Note:

Public Call

Private Call

Conditions

• Each trunk has its service type: public, private, or VPN. Select VPN to use this service through system programming.

266 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

• Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service, it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming, and/or Quick

Dialling programming (

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling).

[Quick Dialling Programming Example]

Location No.

Quick Dialling No.

Quick Dialling 01 2345 (extension no. of other PBX)

: :

Desired No.

9-123-4321 (Public no. of extension 2345)

:

Explanation:

When an extension user dials "2345", he is connected to extension "2345" of other PBX whose public number is "123-4321".

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 TIE Line Service

Feature Guide 267

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.3 QSIG Network

1.28.3.1 QSIG Network—SUMMARY

Description

QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network. The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method.

Each ISDN (QSIG) connection must have a master port on one Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX and a slave port on the other Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX to establish a QSIG network.

[Connection Example]

Extn.1000

:

Extn.1999

PBX-1

(A) Master (A) Slave

PBX-2

Extn. 2000

:

Extn. 2999

QSIG Network

(B) Master (C) Slave

(B) Slave

(C) Master

PBX-3

Extn. 3000

:

Extn. 3999

System programming controls the following services individually for each ISDN (QSIG) port.

[Service Table]

Service

Calling Line

Identification

Presentation (CLIP)

Connected Line

Identification

Presentation (COLP)

Calling Line

Identification

Restriction (CLIR)

Connected Line

Identification

Restriction (COLR)

Description Details in

Sends the caller’s number to the QSIG network when making a call.

Sends the number of the answered party to the

QSIG network when answering a call.

Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller.

• 1.28.3.2 Calling/

Connected Line

Identification

Presentation

(CLIP/COLP) and

Calling/

Connected Name

Identification

Presentation

(CNIP/CONP)— by QSIG

Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.

268 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

Service

Calling Name

Identification

Presentation (CNIP)

Connected Name

Identification

Presentation (CONP)

Calling Name

Identification

Restriction (CNIR)

Connected Name

Identification

Restriction (CONR)

Call Forwarding (CF)— by QSIG

*

Forwards a call to the QSIG network.

Call Transfer (CT)—by

QSIG

*

Description

Sends the caller’s name to the QSIG network when making a call.

Sends the name of the answered party to the

QSIG network when answering a call.

Prevents the caller’s name being presented to the called party by the caller.

• 1.28.3.2 Calling/

Connected Line

Identification

Presentation

(CLIP/COLP) and

Calling/

Connected Name

Identification

Presentation

(CNIP/CONP)— by QSIG

Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party.

Transfers a call to the QSIG network.

Details in

• 1.28.3.3 Call

Forwarding

(CF)—by QSIG

• 1.28.3.4 Call

Transfer (CT)—by

QSIG

Completion of Calls to

Busy Subscriber

(CCBS)—by QSIG

*

Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG network becomes free.

• 1.28.3.5

Completion of

Calls to Busy

Subscriber

(CCBS)—by

QSIG

*: This feature is not available for the PRI23 card.

Feature Guide References

1.20.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

1.28.1 TIE Line Service

Feature Guide 269

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.3.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation

(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification

Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Description

Calling Line/Name Identification Presentation (CLIP/CNIP):

The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when an extension user makes a call. The called party can see the number and/or name on his telephone display before answering the call.

Connected Line/Name Identification Presentation (COLP/CONP):

The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number and/or name of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered.

These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:

CLIP/COLP: ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services.

CNIP/CONP: ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services.

[CLIP/CNIP Example]

1) Dials "202".

2) "John

101"

is displayed.

PBX-1

CLIP: 101

CNIP: John

PBX-2

Caller

(Extn. No.: 101

Extn. Name: John)

Called party

(Extn. No.: 202)

[COLP/CONP Example]

1) Dials "203".

Caller

3) "Paul

204"

is displayed.

PBX-1

COLP: 204

CONP: Paul

PBX-2

Called party

(Extn. No.: 203

Extn. Name: Tom)

FWD, IRNA, etc.

Answering party

(Extn. No.: 204

Extn. Name: Paul)

2) Answers the call.

270 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

CLIP/COLP Number:

The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned for each extension through system programming (

Extension Number [003]).

CNIP/CONP Name:

The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP/CONP can be assigned for each extension through system programming (

Extension Name [004]).

Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.

Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/CONR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network. When CLIR is activated, CNIR becomes active automatically. When COLR is activated, CONR becomes active automatically.

These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:

CLIR/COLR: ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services.

CNIR/CONR: ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services.

Conditions

COLP/CLIR/COLR/CNIP/CONP/CNIR/CONR Assignment for Each Port

Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.

CLIR Button and COLR Button

It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button.

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])

1.7.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone

(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])

1.7.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling

Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])

Feature Guide 271

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.3.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Description

The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network. The destination can be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of trunk calls (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)).

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 257 Diversion supplementary services.

If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call, the following situation will be possible.

[Example]

QSIG

PBX-1

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001

Dials "2000".

1

Call to 2000

2

Forwarded to 1001

PBX-2

Extn. 2000

(Forward Destination

of Trunk Calls: 1001)

1

Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials extension number

"2000", and the call is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2 through QSIG network.

2

The call is forwarded to the forward destination of trunk calls of extension 2000, which is extension "1001" of

PBX-1.

3

The call between PBX-1 and

PBX-2 is released, and the call is connected directly to the forward destination of extension 2000.

QSIG

PBX-1 PBX-2

3

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000

Conditions

• This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.

272 Feature Guide

User Manual References

User Manual

1.5.1 Forwarding Calls

1.28 Networking Features

Feature Guide 273

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.3.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Description

The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 261 Call transfer supplementary service.

If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call, the following situation will be possible.

[Example]

QSIG

PBX-1

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001

Dials "2000".

1

Call to 2000

2

Transferred to 1001

PBX-2

Extn. 2000

1

Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials extension number

"2000", and the call is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2 through QSIG network.

2

The call is transferred from extension 2000 to extension

"1001" of PBX-1.

3

The call between PBX-1 and

PBX-2 is released, and the call is connected directly to the transfer destination of extension 2000.

QSIG

PBX-1

3

PBX-2

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000

Conditions

• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis.

• Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible.

(

1.11.1 Call Transfer)

274 Feature Guide

User Manual References

User Manual

1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)

1.28 Networking Features

Feature Guide 275

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.3.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by

QSIG

Description

If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in QSIG network and the called party is busy, an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that party's number is automatically dialled.

This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 366 Call completion supplementary services.

Conditions

• This feature is available under the following conditions:

a)

The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS.

b)

The called party's PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.

• To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis through system programming.

• An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.

• The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer

276 Feature Guide

1.28 Networking Features

1.28.4 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

Description

The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network.

VoIP network supports the private network communications by the TIE line service method.

[Example]

PBX-1 PBX-2

Extn.1000

:

Extn.1999

IP-GW

Router

Private IP

Network

Router

IP-GW

Extn.2000

:

Extn.2999

Dials "2999".

PBX-3

Router

IP-GW

Extn.3000

:

Extn.3999

[Required Programming]

PBX

Device

IP-GW

(IP Gateway Circuit)

Programming

For making a call:

• ARS programming (

1.9.1 Automatic Route

Selection (ARS)) or TIE line service

programming

For receiving a call:

• TIE line service programming

• IP address assignment for the own PBX and other PBXs.

Conditions

• QSIG service is available. (

1.28.3 QSIG Network)

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 TIE Line Service

Feature Guide 277

1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Features

1.29.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Description

Connecting a personal computer (PC) to this PBX (via a DPT with the USB Module, or via a

Server PC on a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC.

There are two types of CTI as follows:

1)

First Party Call Control

2)

Third Party Call Control

1.

First Party Call Control

A PC is connected to a DPT using a USB port (USB Module) attached to the DPT. The PC monitors the status of the DPT and controls the DPT.

PBX

USB

DPT

PC

2.

Third Party Call Control

A Server PC is connected to the PBX using the USB port on the PBX or using the CTI-

LINK card as a CTI interface. PCs monitor the status of the PBX and control the PBX via the Server PC.

PBX

Server PC

LAN or USB

CTI

Interface

PC PC

LAN

278 Feature Guide

1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

Conditions

Application Programming Interface (API)/Protocol

The following interface is required for First Party Call Control and Third Party Call Control:

Type

First Party Call

Control

API/Protocol

ECMA CSTA Phase 3

Third Party Call

Control

• ECMA CSTA Phase 3

• TAPI 2.1

• The operating system of PC or Server PC required for First Party Call Control or Third

Party Call Control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

• One Server PC can be connected per PBX.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.3.1 MPR Card

2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card

2.7.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

Feature Guide 279

1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

280 Feature Guide

Section 2

System Configuration and Administration

Features

Feature Guide 281

2.1 System Configuration—Hardware

2.1

System Configuration—Hardware

2.1.1

Extension Port Configuration

Description

There are three types of extension ports as follows:

a)

DPT Port: DPT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS (KX-TVS/TVP series [DPT (Digital)

Integration]), or PT-interface CS (e.g., KX-TDA0141) can be connected.

b)

SLT Port: SLT or KX-TVS/TVP series (DTMF Integration) can be connected.

c)

Super Hybrid Port: DPT, APT, SLT, DSS Console, KX-TVS/TVP series, or PTinterface CS can be connected.

EXtra Device Port (XDP) of Super Hybrid Ports:

A DPT and SLT can be connected to one Super Hybrid port (TR: SLT, HL: DPT). In this case, the SLT port (TR) of the Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone. There are two modes for the XDP port as follows:

Mode

Parallel Mode

XDP Mode

Description

The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension. They use the main telephone’s (DPT’s) extension data (e.g., extension number, COS).

(

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone)

The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions. To use XDP mode,

XDP mode must be enabled (on) the port through system programming (

EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600]).

Conditions

Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port

A DPT, APT, SLT, or PT-interface CS can be connected to a Super Hybrid port without programming.

• A DSS Console or a VPS (Panasonic KX-TVS/TVP series [DPT (Digital) Integration]) can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode.

APT and SLT in Parallel Mode

An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode.

Digital XDP

A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as a completely different extension. (

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone)

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

A PS can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone.

(

1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment

When a DSS Console is connected, a paired extension must be assigned through system programming (

Console Paired Telephone [007]). Only a PT can be a paired extension.

282 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2

System Configuration—Software

2.2.1

Class of Service (COS)

Description

Each extension is assigned a COS number (

Class of Service [602]). The following features

are controlled on a COS basis:

a)

Internal Call Block (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block)

b)

FWD (

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))

c)

DND Override (

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND))

d)

Call Pickup (

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)

e)

Account Code Entry (

1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry)

f)

External Call Block (

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access)

g)

Executive Busy Override (

1.7.2 Executive Busy Override)

h)

Call Monitor (

1.7.3 Call Monitor)

i)

OHCA (

1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA))

j)

Whisper OHCA (

1.7.4.4 Whisper OHCA)

k)

TRS/Call Barring (

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))

l)

Extension Lock (

1.8.3 Extension Lock)

m)

Walking COS (

1.8.5 Walking COS)

n)

Trunk Call Limitation (

1.10.8 Trunk Call Limitation)

o)

Call Transfer (

1.11.1 Call Transfer)

p)

Door Open (

1.16.2 Door Open)

q)

DISA (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))

r)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) (

1.20.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN

(P-MP))

s)

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode (

1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

t)

SMDR for Outgoing Trunk Call (

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))

u)

Time Service Switching (

2.2.4 Time Service)

v)

Manager Features (

2.2.6 Manager Features)

w)

PT Programming (

2.3.2 PT Programming)

Conditions

Walking COS

Extension users can make a call from other extensions of the lower level COS by using their own higher level COS temporarily.

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions

Feature Guide 283

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.2

Group

Description

This PBX supports various types of groups.

1.

Trunk Group

Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups (e.g., for each carrier, trunk type, etc.) (

LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402]). Several settings can be assigned

on a trunk group basis. All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group.

One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis.

Port basis: LCOT/DID/E & M/ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI23/ISDN-PRI30

Channel basis: E1/T1

2.

User Group

The PBX supports user groups (

User Group [603]), each of which is used to compose

the following groups:

a)

Tenant (

2.2.3 Tenant Service)

b)

Call Pickup Group (See below.)

c)

Paging Group (See below.)

Every extension must belong to one user group, but cannot belong to more than one user group.

Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX

[Example]

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

2.1 Call Pickup Group (

User Groups of a Pickup Group [650])

Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within a specified group. One user group can belong to several call pickup groups.

(

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)

[Example]

Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

284 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2 Paging Group (

User Groups of a Paging Group [640])

Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging groups or answer a page to their own groups. One user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups.

(

1.14.1 Paging)

[Example]

Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Paging Group 4

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2

3.

Idle Extension Hunting Group

If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming (

Idle Extension Hunting Group Member

[681]). Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting

type: Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting (

Idle Extension Hunting Type [680]).

(

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting)

4.

Incoming Call Distribution Group

An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group (

Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]). Each incoming

call distribution group has a floating extension number (

Incoming Call Distribution

Group Floating Extension Number [622]) and name ( Incoming Call Distribution Group

Name [623]). One extension can belong to multiple groups.

Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX/PS Ring Group

(

1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features)

[Example]

Incoming Call

Distribution Group 1

(Floating Extn. No. 280,

Name: Sales 1)

Incoming Call

Distribution Group 2

(Floating Extn. No. 290,

Name: Sales 2)

Extn. 103 Extn. 104

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102

Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

Feature Guide 285

2.2 System Configuration—Software

5.

VM Group

There are two types of VM groups as follows:

Type

VM (DTMF) Group

VM (DPT) Group

Description

A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF

Integration features.

One SLT port can belong to only one group.

A group of DPT ports (

VM Group Floating Extension

Number [660]) which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration features.

One DPT port can belong to only one group.

(

1.23.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group)

[Example]

PBX

DPT

Port

SLT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

VM (DPT) Group

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

VM (DTMF) Group

VPS

(DPT [Digital] Integration)

VPS

(DTMF Integration)

6.

PS Ring Group

PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each group has a floating extension number and name through system programming. One PS can belong to multiple groups.

(

1.24.2 PS Ring Group)

PS Ring Group 1

(Floating Extn. No. 301,

Name: Sales 1)

PS Ring Group 2

(Floating Extn. No. 302,

Name: Sales 2)

PS01

PS02

PS03

PS04

PS05

PS06

286 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.3

Tenant Service

Description

This PBX can be shared with certain number of tenants.

1.

Tenant Configuration

1.1 Tenant Member

The tenant members consist of user groups. One user group can belong to only one tenant. Therefore, one extension can belong to only one tenant.

(

2.2.2 Group)

1.2 Time Service

Each tenant has a Time Table. The Start and/or End time of each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively.

(

2.2.4 Time Service)

[Example]

Tenant 1 Tenant 2

User Group 1

User Group 2

User Group 3

User Group 4

Use Time Table 1

User Group 5

User Group 6

Use Time Table 2

2.

System Management

Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant.

a)

Tenant Operator (extension number/floating extension number of incoming call distribution group/none) (

2.2.5 Operator Features)

b)

ARS Mode (Off/Local Access/All Access/System) (

1.9.1 Automatic Route

Selection (ARS))

c)

Music Source for Music on Hold (System/BGM Number/Cyclic Tone)

(

1.12.4 Music on Hold)

Feature Guide 287

2.2 System Configuration—Software

[Programming Example]

Tenant No.

3

:

1

2

Operator

Extn.101

None *1

Floating extn. no. 200

:

ARS Mode

Local Access

System *2

Off

:

Music Source

System *3

Cyclic Tone

BGM1

:

*1

:

Follows the system assignment of a PBX operator (

Operator Assignment [006])

*2

:

Follows the system assignment of the ARS mode (

ARS Mode [320])

*3

:

Follows the system assignment of the music source for the Music on Hold

(

Music on Hold [711])

Conditions

Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block

The following features can be restricted based on the COS for each extension (not based on the tenant) by the Internal Call Block feature (

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block):

– Calling extensions or doorphone(s) in the restricted tenant(s)

– Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant(s)

– Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant(s).

[Example]

Tenant 1

Extension Group 1

Tenant 2

Extension Group 3

COS

1

Extn. 100 Extn. 101

COS

2

Extension Group 2

Extn. 102 Extn. 103

Tenant 3

Extension Group 5

COS

5

Extn. 108 Extn. 109

COS

6

Extension Group 6

COS

3

Extn. 104 Extn. 105

COS

4

Extension Group 4

Extn. 106 Extn. 107

Extn. 110 Extn. 111

288 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

[Programming Example]

Caller

Called Party

COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6

COS 1

COS 2

COS 3

COS 4

:

COS 5

COS 6

: : : : : :

: Block

Explanation:

1.

Assign each extension in a tenant to a certain COS number. Each tenant must have unique COS numbers.

Tenant 1: COS 1 and COS 2

Tenant 2: COS 3 and COS 4

Tenant 3: COS 5 and COS 6

2.

Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block enables by the Internal Call Block feature.

a)

Tenant 1 (COS 1 and COS 2) can make calls to both Tenant 2 (COS 3 and COS

4) and Tenant 3 (COS 5 and COS 6) as well as Tenant 1.

b)

Tenant 2 (COS 3 and COS 4) can make calls to Tenant 1 (COS 1 and COS 2) and Tenant 2.

c)

Tenant 3 (COS 5 and COS 6) can make calls to Tenant 3 itself only.

• An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis (

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group

Features—SUMMARY):

– Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue

– The Time Table which determines the overflow destination.

...

...

:

...

...

...

...

...

Feature Guide 289

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.4

Time Service

Description

This PBX supports day, night, lunch, and break modes of operation. TRS/Barring can be arranged separately. The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode.

1.

Time Service Switching Mode

Day/lunch/break/night mode can be switched either automatically or manually (

Time

Service Switching Mode [101]). The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant.

The switching mode can also be changed by pressing the Time Service Switching Mode

(Automatic/Manual) button. This can be performed by only an extension assigned as the manager, or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis (

Time Service Manual

Switching [514]).

Type

Automatic

Manual

Description

The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time

Table.

A manager, or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis (

Time

Service Manual Switching [514]) can switch mode by dialling the

feature number or pressing the Time Service button.

Even while in the Automatic Switching mode, day/lunch/break/night mode can be changed manually.

2.

Time Table

Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode. The Start and/or

End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively.

290 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

[Time Table Example]

Time Schedule

MON

TUE

:

Day 1 start

Lunch start

Day 2 start

Break 1 start

Break 1 end (Day restart)

Night start

Day 1 start

Lunch start

Day 2 start

Break 1 start

Break 1 end (Day restart)

Night start

:

1

08:00

12:00

13:00

NONE

NONE

16:00

08:00

12:05

13:00

NONE

NONE

16:31

:

Time Table No. (Tenant No.)

2 3

11:00

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

20:00

11:00

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

20:00

:

08:00

16:00

NONE

NONE

NONE

12:00

08:00

13:00

NONE

NONE

NONE

17:00

:

4

08:00

12:00

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

08:00

13:00

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

:

<Time Service Image of Monday and Tuesday>

Time Table No.

00:00

1

Night

08:00 11:00 12:00 13:00

Day 1

Lunch

Day 2

16:00

2

Night Day 1

3

4

Night

Night

Day 1

Day 1

Night

20:00

Night

24:00

Night

08:00

Day 1

Lunch

Lunch

Day 1

Day 1

3.

Features Using Time Service

The following features can be set in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night):

a)

Destination of incoming trunk calls (DIL/DID/DDI/MSN) (

1.1.1 Incoming Trunk

Call Features)

b)

Destination of the Intercept Routing (

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing)

c)

Queuing Time Table for incoming call distribution groups (

1.2.2.3 Queuing

Feature)

d)

Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups (

1.2.2.5 Overflow

Feature)

e)

Destination of incoming doorphone calls (

1.16.1 Doorphone Call)

f)

PBX operator (

2.2.5 Operator Features)

g)

COS for TRS/Barring and for Trunk Access

h)

Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder (

1.26.4 Timed Reminder)

i)

Intercept time for Intercept Routing—No Answer (

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing)

and for DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System

Access (DISA))

[Programming Examples of DID/DDI Table and DIL Table]

DID/DDI table can be programmed for each DID/DDI number, and a tenant (Time Table) number is assigned to each DID/DDI number. DIL table can be programmed for each trunk, and a tenant (Time Table) number is assigned to each trunk.

Feature Guide 291

2.2 System Configuration—Software

<DID/DDI Table>

Location DID/DDI

No.

001

002

:

123-4567

123-2468

:

Tenant

(Time

Table) No.

1

1

:

<DIL Table>

Day

105

102

:

DID/DDI Destination

Lunch Break

100 (VPS)

100 (VPS)

:

105

102

:

Night

100 (VPS)

100 (VPS)

:

Trunk No.

01

02

:

Tenant (Time

Table) No.

1

2

:

Day

101

102

:

DIL Destination

Lunch Break

100 (VPS)

100 (VPS)

:

101

102

:

Explanation:

If a trunk call with a DID number (123-4567) is received at 20:00;

1)

Tenant (Time Table) number 1 will be used.

2)

The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1.

3)

The call will be routed to the extension 100 (VPS).

Night

100 (VPS)

100 (VPS)

:

4.

Holiday Mode

The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode. Up to 24 holidays (start and end dates) can be stored, and one time mode can be selected for all holidays.

5.

Time Service Button

A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons:

a)

Day/Night button

b)

Day/Night/Lunch button

c)

Day/Night/Break button

d)

Day/Night/Lunch/Break button

Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes. For example, pressing the

Day/Night button switches between day and night modes. All of these buttons show the current status as follows:

Light Pattern

Off

Status

Day mode

Red on

Night mode

Green on

Lunch mode

Slow green flashing Break mode

Slow red flashing

Holiday mode

292 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

Note

Any extension user (except extension users allowed to change the mode) can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button.

Conditions

• PT programming (

Time Service Starting Time [102]) can set the Start and/or End time

of the following:

– Day-1 (Day Start time)

– Lunch (Lunch Start time)

– Day-2 (Lunch End time)

– Night (Night Start time)

PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day.

– Break-1 Start

– Break-1 End (Day restart)

– Break-2 Start

– Break-2 End (Day restart)

– Break-3 Start

– Break-3 End (Day restart)

Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) Button

A flexible button can be customised as the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/

Manual) button.

Feature Guide References

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

2.2.3 Tenant Service

User Manual References

User Manual

1.7.10 Checking the Time Service Status

2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control

Feature Guide 293

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.5

Operator Features

Description

This PBX supports a PBX operator and a tenant operator. Any extension and incoming call distribution group can be designated as a PBX and/or a tenant operator.

Type

PBX operator

Tenant operator

Description

An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night)

(

Operator Assignment [006]).

An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant.

[Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3.

Operator Call:

An extension user can call an operator with a simple operation. When an operator call is made, the call is routed to the tenant operator. If no tenant operator exists, the call will be routed to the PBX operator. The time mode depends on the tenant of the calling extension. If neither the tenant operator nor the PBX operator exists, the caller will hear reorder tone.

Conditions

• An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both the tenant and

PBX operator.

• A tenant operator can be assigned for multiple tenants.

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service

User Manual References

User Manual

1.2.1 Basic Calling

294 Feature Guide

2.2 System Configuration—Software

2.2.6

Manager Features

Description

An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) is allowed to use the specified features. COS programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features (

Manager Assignment [511]):

Feature Description

Manager

Password

Required –

Details in

Manager

Programm ing

Manager

Password

Change

Changes the manager password.

Call

Charge

Managem ent

Sets, sees, clears, and prints the call charge data.

Required

• 1.25.2

Charge Meter

Verified

Code

Personal

Identificati on

Number

(PIN) Set

Sets a verified code PIN for each verified code.

Remote

PIN Clear

Required

• 1.8.6 Verified

Code Entry

Clears the extension PIN of an extension remotely, and a verified code PIN. PIN Lock is also unlocked.

Required

• 1.26.1

Extension

Personal

Identification

Number (PIN)

• 1.8.6 Verified

Code Entry

Remote

Extension

Lock

Dial Tone Transfer

Sets or cancels the Extension Lock on an extension remotely.

Changes the TRS/Barring level of the extension temporarily.

[Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call (e.g., international call).

Required

• 1.8.3

Extension

Lock

Not required

• 1.8.4 Dial

Tone Transfer

Outgoing Message

(OGM)

Records and plays back outgoing messages (OGMs).

Not required

Time Service

BGM—External

Switches the time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) manually.

Sets the External BGM on and off.

Not required

Not required

• 1.16.5

Outgoing

Message

(OGM)

• 2.2.4 Time

Service

• 1.16.4

Background

Music (BGM)

Feature Guide 295

2.2 System Configuration—Software

Conditions

WARNING

When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)

Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.

b)

Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.

c)

Change the PIN frequently.

Manager Password

One manager password can be assigned per PBX (

Manager Password [112]).

User Manual References

User Manual

2.1 Control Features

3.2.2 Manager Programming

296 Feature Guide

2.3 System Data Control

2.3

System Data Control

2.3.1

PC Programming

Description

This PBX can be programmed and administered using a personal computer (PC). There are two programming methods:

1)

On-site Programming: System programming/diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly.

2)

Remote Programming: System programming/diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location.

1.

On-site Programming:

Method

Using the Serial

Interface (RS-232C) port

Description

The PBX has a Serial Interface (RS-232C) port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR (

1.25.1

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).

Using the USB port

The PC is connected to the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT.

A CTI-LINK card must be installed.

Using the LAN interface (KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

Using a modem through an SLT port*

(KX-TDA30/KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

An RMT card must be installed. Assign the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance (

Modem

Floating Extension Number [811]), and dial this number from

the PC to connect to the PBX.

Using an ISDN TA interface (64 kbps) through an ISDN

Extension Line*

Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance (

ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

[812]), and dial this number from the PC to connect to the

PBX. The RMT card is not required for this method.

This method is available only when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used.

*: If remote access is disabled through system programming (

Remote

Programming [810]), then this on site programming cannot be done.

Feature Guide 297

2.3 System Data Control

2.

Remote Programming:

Method Description

Using a modem

(RMT card)

An RMT card must be installed. The floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned (

Modem

Floating Extension Number [811]).

PC programming, using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem, can be done in the following ways:

Direct Access

Dial the DIL/DID/DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance.

Through DISA

Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature. (

1.16.6 Direct Inward

System Access (DISA))

Call Transfer

Call an extension (probably the operator), and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance. (

1.11.1 Call Transfer)

Using an external modem

(Not RMT card)

An external modem can be used instead of an RMT card to perform the remote programming. An external modem can be connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) of the PBX. Connect the modem to an extension port which is assigned as the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN destination or to a trunk directly to connect to the PBX from the PC.

An AT command can be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port. AT commands can be programmed beforehand through system programming to initialise the modem. An AT command can also be sent manually in the PT system programming mode (

External Modem Control

[801]).

Using an ISDN

TA interface (64 kbps) through an ISDN Trunk

The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance must be assigned (

ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

[812]), and dial the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN number whose destination is

the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance.

The RMT card is not required for this method.

This method is available only when an user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used.

Conditions

• Access to system programming is allowed only one at a time.

Programmer Code and Password for System Programming

To access system programming, a programmer code and its password must be entered.

There are three programmer codes, which are set at the factory. Each programmer code has a unique password which is also set at the factory.

Programmer codes can be changed using the Maintenance Console, by selecting

"Programmer Code Change" from the "Tool" menu. Passwords can be changed through system programming. If the wrong password is entered a preprogrammed number of times

(Default: None [no limitation]) remotely, access will be locked and can only be unlocked by enabling remote access through system programming (

Remote Programming [810]).

298 Feature Guide

2.3 System Data Control

Programmer

Code

Installer Level

Programmer

Code

Administrator

Level

Programmer

Code

User Level

Programmer

Code

Password

System Password for Installer

Description

All system programming is accessible.

System Password for Administrator— for PC Programming

Permitted system programming is accessible. Each system programming can be determined whether to be accessed by the administrator.

System Password for User—for PC

Programming

Permitted system programming is accessible. Each system programming can be determined whether to be accessed by the end users.

Remote Programming Limitation

It is possible to disable remote access through system programming (

Remote

Programming [810]).

• If an extension user sets the Walking Extension feature while the extension data (e.g.,

Headset mode) is programmed through PC programming, some extension data for the user may not be transferred properly.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.3.1 MPR Card

2.3.3 RMT Card

2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card

3.1 Overview — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.2 Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.5.7 RMT Card

7.1 Overview — KX-TDA30

7.2 Connection — KX-TDA30

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

3.2 PC Programming

Feature Guide 299

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.2

PT Programming

Description

A PT user can perform the following programming:

a)

Personal Programming: Customising the extension according to his needs.

b)

System Programming: Customising the PBX according to organisational needs.

c)

Manager Programming: Customising specified frequently changing items (e.g.,

Charge Management and Remote Extension Lock).

Conditions

• COS programming determines what programming can be performed (

Programming

Mode Limitation [516]):

– System programming and personal programming

– Personal programming only

– No programming

• The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS.

• The extension(s) assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming.

• During programming, the PT is considered to be busy.

• Access to system programming and manager programming is allowed only one at a time.

However, one PBX supports up to 16 simultaneous programmers (one system programmer + 15 personal programmers, one manager programmer + 15 personal programmers, or 16 personal programmers).

System Programming Password Level

To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. There are two types of passwords, which are set at the factory, and can be changed through system programming.

Type Description

System Password for Administrator— for PT Programming

All system programming available for PT programming is accessible (

System Password for Administrator—for PT

Programming [110]).

System Password for User—for PT

Programming

Permitted system programming is accessible (

System

Password for User—for PT Programming [111]). Each access to

system programming can be controlled.

Personal Programming Data Default Set

A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default.

Feature Guide References

2.2.6 Manager Features

3.3 PT Programming

300 Feature Guide

User Manual References

User Manual

3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)

3.2 Manager Programming

3.3 Customising Your System (System Programming)

2.3 System Data Control

Feature Guide 301

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.3

Quick Setup

Description

It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a personal computer (PC). When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time with the Installer Level Programmer Code (

2.3.1 PC

Programming), Quick Setup display will appear automatically. The following items can be

programmed as desired:

Date & Time

Set

Item Parameter

Year/Month/

Date/Hour/

Minute

Description

The date and time set on the PC will be used.

System

Password for

Installer

4–10 characters Enter the system password for installer.

Operator &

Manager

Extension

Number

Assign the PBX operator to all time modes (day/lunch/ break/night) (

2.2.5 Operator Features). The

extension assigned as the PBX operators is automatically allowed to perform manager operation (

2.2.6 Manager Features).

Flexible

Numbering

Type

1. Pattern 1

(with )

2. Pattern 2

(without )

If "

Pattern 1

(with )" is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature.

[Example] Call Pickup feature number

Pattern 1 (with ): 41

Pattern 2 (without ): 41

Operator/

Local Access

Remote

Maintenance

Number

1. 0/9

2. 9/0

For default of the flexible numbers, refer to the [Flexible

Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]

(

2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering).

The feature numbers for Operator Call and Idle Line

Access can be selected. They will be "0" or "9".

Remote

Maintenance Dial

Number

Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX

(including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.

302 Feature Guide

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.4

Automatic Setup

Description

There are two automatic setup features as follows:

1) Automatic ISDN Configuration

2) Automatic Time Adjustment

1.

Automatic ISDN Configuration

The ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically through system programming.

The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN (BRI) port:

a)

L1 Active Mode

b)

L2 Data Link Mode

c)

Access Mode (Point-to Point/Point-to-Multipoint)

d)

TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00–63/Automatic)

2.

Automatic Time Adjustment

It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways:

a)

Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) Setting:

The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed. The PBX clock will be adjusted (one hour forward or backward) at 2:00AM of the programmed date, if enabled through system programming. It means 2:00 AM will become 3:00 AM on the start date of the summer time, and 2:00 AM will become 1:00 AM on the end date.

Note

If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set;

– On the summer time start date, the setting between 2:00 AM and 3:00 AM will not happen.

– On the summer time end date, the setting between 1:00 AM and 2:00 AM will ring twice.

b)

Time Information from Telephone Company:

Time information can be received on the following calls:

• An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line

• An incoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information.

The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3:05 AM, if enabled through system programming.

Note

If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment.

Conditions

• SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer time. (

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording

(SMDR))

Feature Guide 303

2.3 System Data Control

Feature Guide References

1.20.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

1.26.4 Timed Reminder

304 Feature Guide

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.5

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Description

To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required.

There are three types of numbering plans:

1) Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

2) Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)

3) Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking)

1.

Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use (

Flexible Numbering [100]). The numbers must not conflict.

It is also possible to use default (Pattern 1 or Pattern 2) shown in the following table:

a)

Extension Numbers (Extension Numbering Scheme 1 through 32): Up to fourdigit number (up to two-digit leading number consisting of "0 through 9" ) + additional digits (up to two digits, default: two digits)

[Example]

If the number "3" as a leading number for the 1st extension numbering scheme and the "2" as an additional digit have been programmed, the extension number 300 through 399 are available.

b)

Feature Numbers: Up to four-digit number consisting of "0 through 9", " ", and "#"

c)

Other PBX Extension Numbers (Other PBX Extension Number [TIE] -1 through

16): Up to three-digit number consisting of "0 through 9", " ", and "#"

[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]

Feature

Pattern 1

(with )

1 / 2

Default

Pattern 2

(without )

11

Extension Numbering Scheme 1—Leading

Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 2—Leading

Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 3—Leading

Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 4—Leading

Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 5—Leading

Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 6—Leading

Number

2 / 3

3 / 4

4 / 5

5 / 6

6 / None

12

13

14

15

16

Feature Guide 305

2.3 System Data Control

Feature

Extension Numbering Scheme 7–32—Leading

Number

Operator Call

Idle Line Access (Local Access)

Trunk Group Access

TIE Line Access

Redial

Speed Dialling—System/Personal

Personal Speed Dialling—Programming

Doorphone Call

Broadcasting

Group Paging

External BGM on/off

Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record/ clear

S-CO Line Access

Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel

Group Call Pickup

Directed Call Pickup

TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager

Group Paging answer

Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel

User Remote Operation/Walking COS/Verified

Code Entry

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel

Account Code Entry

Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve

Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Holding

Extension Number

Call Park/Call Park Retrieve

Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Held Trunk

Number

Pattern 1

(with )

Default

Pattern 2

(without )

None None

9 / 0

0 / 9

*

8

7

#

9 / 0

0 / 9

8

None

#

deleted: 4

41

42

43

46

47

37

39

40

48

49

50

51

30

31

32

33

35

36

52

53

42

43

46

47

37

39

40

41

30

31

32

33

35

36

48

49

50

51

52

53

306 Feature Guide

Feature

Door Open

External Feature Access

ISDN Hold

COLR set/cancel

CLIR set/cancel

Switch CLIP/COLP of the Trunk/Extension

MCID

ISDN-FWD set/cancel/confirm

Message Waiting set/cancel/callback

FWD/DND set/cancel—Both

FWD/DND set/cancel—External

FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal

FWD/DND No Answer Timer set

Group FWD set/cancel—Both

Group FWD set/cancel—External

Group FWD set/cancel—Internal

Call Pickup Deny set/cancel

Paging Deny set/cancel

Walking Extension

Data Line Security set/cancel

Call Waiting for Intercom Calls set/cancel

Call Waiting for Trunk Calls (including doorphone calls, calls for an incoming call distribution group) set/cancel

Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel

Not Ready Mode on/off

Log-in/Log-out

Incoming Call Queue Monitor

Hot Line programme/set/cancel

Absent Message set/cancel

2.3 System Data Control

Pattern 1

(with )

Default

Pattern 2

(without )

55

55

60

60

62

62

7 0 7 0

7 1

7 2

7 3

7 5

7 1

7 2

7 3

7 5

70

70

710

711

712

710

711

712

713

713

714

715

716

720

714

715

716

720

721

727

730

731

732

721

727

730

731

732

733

735

736

739

740

750

733

735

736

739

740

750

Feature Guide 307

2.3 System Data Control

Feature

BGM set/cancel

Timed Reminder set/cancel

Extension Lock set/cancel

Time Service Switch

Remote Extension Lock off

Remote Extension Lock on

Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) set/cancel

Dial Information (CTI)

Other PBX Extension Number (TIE) 1–16

Quick Dialling 1–80

Pattern 1

(with )

Default

Pattern 2

(without )

751

751

760

760

77

77

780

780

782

782

783

783

790

799

None

None

None

790

799

None

None

None

* : For users in New Zealand, the default value of Idle Line Access (Local Access) is "1".

2.

Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)

Feature numbers which are available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use. The numbers should be one digit ("0 through 9" , " ", or "#" ) and must not conflict. For default, refer to the following table:

[Flexible Numbering Table (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)]

Feature

Call Waiting/DND Override

Default

1 or 2* deleted:

KX-T7710 MESSAGE Button

KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling 1–8

Executive Busy Override

Message Waiting set

Call Monitor

Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

3

4

5

6

*1: For users in Germany, France,

Belgium, Norway, Sweden,

Denmark, Finland,

Portugal, Italy, and New Zealand

*2: For users in the United Kingdom

*3: For users in other countries/areas

*: To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default.

3.

Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking)

The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following table:

308 Feature Guide

2.3 System Data Control

[Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)]

Feature Fixed

Numbering

Pulse to Tone Conversion

Conference

Door Open

3

5

Conditions

• The PBX has default for numbers.

• The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.

Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)

Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0".

• If a feature number includes " " or "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it.

• ISDN extension users cannot use the following features:

– OGM playback/record

– Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve (held at its own extension)

– ISDN Hold

– MCID

– Walking Extension

– Call Waiting

– Hot Line

– Timed Reminder

– Executive Busy Override

– Call Monitor

– Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS

• PS users cannot use the following features:

– Personal Speed Dialling

– OGM playback/record

– S-CO Line Access

– Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel

– Walking Extension

– BGM set/cancel

– Timed Reminder

User Manual References

User Manual

4.2.1 Feature Number Table

Feature Guide 309

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.6

Floating Extension

Description

Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions.

These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc.

This feature is also known as Floating Station.

Device

Group

Resource

External Pager

Description

Used as the destination for TAFAS feature (

External

Pager Floating Extension Number [700]). (

1.16.3 Trunk

Answer From Any Station (TAFAS))

Outgoing Message

(OGM)

Used to send messages for DISA feature (

Outgoing

Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]). (

1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))

Analogue Remote

Maintenance (KX-

TDA30/KX-

TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

ISDN Remote

Maintenance

Used to access the PC programming mode through a modem on a personal computer (

Extension Number [811]).

Modem Floating

Used to access the PC programming mode through the

ISDN interface on a personal computer (

ISDN Remote

Floating Extension Number [812]).

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Used to call an incoming call distribution group (

Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension

Number [622]). (

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution

Group Features—SUMMARY)

PS Ring Group

VM (DPT) Group

Used to call a PS ring group. (

1.24.2 PS Ring Group)

Used to call a VM (DPT) group (

VM Group Floating

Extension Number [660]).

VM (DTMF) Group

Used to call a VM (DTMF) group.

Conditions

• It is possible to give names to floating extension numbers (

Incoming Call Distribution

Group Name [623], Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731]).

Feature Guide References

1.23.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

2.3.1 PC Programming

310 Feature Guide

2.3 System Data Control

2.3.7

Software Upgrading

Description

It is possible to upload software from a personal computer to the PBX to upgrade the following:

Data File

Main Processing (MPR) software data

Storage Area

Operating system data area on either the

MPR card of the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, or the Main Board of the KX-TDA15/KX-

TDA30.

Default data of system programming for each country/ area

Country/area data area on the MPR card or

Main Board

Language data for PT display Each language data area on the MPR card or Main Board.

There are two types:

Type 1: PT display except for PT system programming (

2.3.2 PT Programming)

(five languages max.)

Type 2: PT system programming data (one language max.)

LPR (software on a slot card) software data (KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200 only)

Flash ROM on the slot card (e.g., BRI8)

Cell Station (CS) software data Flash ROM on the CS

Conditions

• The software version of the MPR can be confirmed through system programming (

Main

Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190]).

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.3.1 MPR Card

Feature Guide 311

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4

Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4.1

Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 only)

Description

When the power supply to the PBX fails, specific SLTs and/or ISDN terminal devices are automatically connected to specific trunks (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from normal operation to the Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.

Only the trunks handled by Power Failure Connections can be used during a power failure.

Conditions

[General]

• Only trunk calls can be made during a power failure. All other features do not work.

DC Power Source

If the DC power is available from backup batteries, even if the AC power fails, the PBX will remain fully operational.

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

• The analogue trunk cards and extension cards and the number of ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows:

Trunk Cards: LCOT16 (four ports), LCOT8 (two ports), and LCOT4 (two ports)

Extension Cards: MSLC16 (four ports), SLC16 (four ports), DHLC8 (two ports) and SLC8

(two ports).

To each trunk card, connect only one extension card.

Note

Power Failure Connections between analogue trunk cards and extension cards should be done as per system programming so that conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the MPR is recovering.

• The BRI8 (one port) and BRI4 (one port) cards can also be used for Power Failure

Connections. For details about Power Failure Connections, refer to the Installation Manual.

[KX-TDA30]

• Ports 1 and 2 of the LCOT card installed in the least slot number and ports 1 and 2 of the

Super Hybrid ports can be used for Power Failure Connections.

Note

The Power Failure Connections between the LCOT card and Super Hybrid ports are automatically kept so that the conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the Main Board is recovering.

312 Feature Guide

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

• The BRI2 (one port) card can also be used for Power Failure Connections. For details about Power Failure Connections, refer to the Installation Manual.

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

2.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection

2.12.1 Power Failure Connections

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

6.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection

6.11.1 Power Failure Connections

Feature Guide 313

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4.2

Power Failure Restart

Description

When turning the electricity back on, the PBX restarts the stored data automatically and the

PBX will record the event (System Restart) in the error log.

Conditions

• In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy

(Camp-on) (

1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)) and Call Park (

1.12.2 Call

Park).

314 Feature Guide

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

2.4.3

Local Alarm Information

Description

When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it, the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension, which is allowed to use this feature through system programming (a maximum of two extensions per PBX), turns on red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest. The System Alarm button light turns off automatically after all error numbers have been displayed.

For details about the errors and their solutions, refer to the Installation Manual.

[Error Example]

ERR #100 (10000)

(1) (2)

[Explanation]

Number in the

Example

(1)

(2)

Item

Error Code

Sub Code

Description

Shows three-digit error code.

Shows five-digit sub code (XYYZZ).

X: Cabinet number (1–4)

YY: Slot number (00–11)

ZZ: Physical port number (01–16)

Conditions

System Alarm Button

A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button.

• If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses a PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be displayed on the PC.

• If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses a PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be sent to the preprogrammed party via the PC Console or PC Phone. The

PC Console and PC Phone use e-mail to send the information.

• The alarm information will be recorded on the SMDR, if enabled through system programming.

• The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday.

Feature Guide 315

2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

Installation Manual References

Installation Manual

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>

8.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Flexible Buttons

1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

316 Feature Guide

Section 3

Programming Instructions

Feature Guide 317

3.1 Introduction

3.1

Introduction

3.1.1

Introduction

These Programming Instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. The PBX has a default setting. You can change the default to meet your requirements. System programming controls the PBX features described in this Feature Guide. It allows the PBX to be customised to the requirements. Only one person can programme at a time. Another person trying to enter programming mode will be rejected.

Ways to Programme

There are two programming methods:

PC (Personal Computer) Programming

All system programming can be performed. PC programming is described in Section

3.2 PC Programming.

PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming

A subset of system programming can be performed. PT programming is described in

Section 3.3 PT Programming. The extension user can programme by entering 3 digits

programming numbers from the PT.

Password Security

A password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.

Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password

1.

Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers.

2.

Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.

3.

Please change the password periodically.

4.

We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers.

5.

If the system password is forgotten, you can examine the backup of the system programming. Therefore, please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised access.

• If you have a backup of the system data, you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool. For how to back up the system data, refer to Section 3.3.4

Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 7.3.4 Hybrid IP-

PBX Maintenance (for KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30) in the Installation Manual.

• If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it. Therefore, we recommend that you back up the system data.

318 Feature Guide

3.2 PC Programming

3.2

PC Programming

3.2.1

Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

To programme and administer the PBX by personal computer (PC), you need to install the

Maintenance Console (KX-TDA Maintenance Console for the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-

TDA30 Maintenance Console for the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30) onto the computer.

This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable. The screenshots shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.

System Requirements

Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Hardware

• CPU: Intel ® Pentium ® 133 MHz or better microprocessor

• RAM: at least 64 megabytes (MB) of free RAM (128 MB recommended)

• HDD: at least 100 MB of hard disc space

Feature Guide 319

3.2 PC Programming

Installing the Maintenance Console and Selecting the Appropriate

Country/Area Data

1.

a.

Save the setup file of the Maintenance

Console on your PC.

b.

Double-click the icon to execute the setup file.

c.

Follow the instructions of the wizard.

2.

a.

Type the appropriate Country Code.

The Maintenance Console will be installed with the appropriate default data for your country/area.

b.

Click [Next].

c.

Follow the instructions of the wizard.

d.

Click [Finish].

e.

Click [OK].

Notes

• To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP

Professional, the user must be grouped either of "Administrators" or "Power Users".

• To connect the PC to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must have been installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver.

• The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.

Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items

(Quick Setup)

When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick

Setup will launch automatically. For details about Quick Setup items, refer to Section 2.3.3

Quick Setup.

1. Connect the PC to the PBX with a USB cable.

2. Start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console or

KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console from the start menu.

320 Feature Guide

3.2 PC Programming

3. Type the Installer Level Programmer Code

(default: 1234), then click [OK].

The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the

Maintenance Console with the Installer Level

Programmer Code.

Note

There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator

Level (default: 1111), and User Level

(default: none).

5. Type the system password for installer

(default: 1234), then click [OK] to log-in.

Feature Guide 321

3.2 PC Programming

6. When country/area data do not match: a.

Click [OK] to replace the country/area data of the PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete.

b.

Follow the procedure described in

Section 2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-

PBX (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or

6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for

KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30) in the Installation

Manual and restart the PBX.

c.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the

Maintenance Console.

7. Follow the instructions of the wizard and assign the basic items (Quick Setup).

The programme menu appears.

Notice

1.

During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. You can think of system data as stored in RAM, whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or system reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost.

To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance

Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data.

2.

When the PBX is initialised, not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card. The data for present status of extension FWD/DND buttons is taken from battery backup memory in the PBX.

322 Feature Guide

3.2 PC Programming

3.

The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.

To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.

CAUTION

Do not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it. Doing so will damage the system data, and in the worst case, damage the SD Memory Card.

Feature Guide 323

3.3 PT Programming

3.3

PT Programming

3.3.1

Programming Instructions

Required Telephone/Extension

A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the system programming. The extension must be in a COS permitted System Programming or the extension connected to the smallest port number.

System programming allows only one extension user to enter at a time.

Buttons and Functions

T7600

Fixed Buttons

T7200/T7400/T7500

REDIAL

Function

PREVIOUS

SP-PHONE

FWD/DND

NEXT

(Page up)

(Page down)

CONF

AUTO DIAL

STORE

HOLD

TRANSFER

AUTO ANS

MUTE

PROGRAM

MESSAGE

PAUSE

FLASH/

RECALL

INTERCOM

SHIFT

ENTER

Back to Previous Menu

(CANCEL)

SHIFT

END

CLEAR

SELECT

PROGRAM

FLASH

SECRET

324 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

Entering System Programming Mode

System programming enables the extension user to set the time, call destination and all sorts of system conditions within the limits of available programming. The administrator or manager can also set up desired parameters for user programming. It is necessary to enter the relevant password to start programming. Programming has two levels: Administrator Level and User

Level.

Administrator Level:

All system programming available for PT programming is accessible.

PROGRAM/

PAUSE

System Password for Administrator

#

—for PT Programming

= 1234

Programming No.

3 digits

User Level:

Permitted system programming is accessible. Each access to system programming can be controlled.

PROGRAM/

PAUSE

System Password for User

—for PT Programming

= 1234

Note

means default value throughout this manual.

Programming Structure

Programming No.

3 digits

Programming

Number

Programming Group Title

[0XX] Basic Programming

Description

Frequently used programming steps.

[1XX]

[2XX]

System Programming

Time Programming

Global system parameters.

Flexible system timers.

[3XX]

[4XX]

[5XX]

[6XX]

[7XX]

[8XX]

[9XX]

TRS/Barring/ARS

Programming

Trunk Programming

TRS/Barring and Automatic Route

Selection (ARS).

Setting of trunk, trunk group, or BRI line features.

COS Programming Class of Service parameters.

Extension Programming Assignment of the extension features

Resource/Interface

Programming

SMDR & Maintenance

Programming

Card Programming

Assignment of the various interfaces on the PBX.

Setting of SMDR and maintenance features.

The programming used to refer to or delete the card.

Feature Guide 325

3.3 PT Programming

Entering Characters

To store a name or message, you can enter the following characters. Those tables show you the characters available on each button.

Table 1 (Standard mode)

Times

Buttons

1 2 3 4

1

!

?

" 1

2

A

5 6 7

B C a b c 2

3

D E F d e f 3

4

G H I g h i 4

5

J K L j k l 5

6

M N O m n o 6

7

P

8 9

Q R S p q r s 7

8

T U V t u v 8

9

0

W X Y Z w x y z 9

(space) .

, ' : ; 0

#

/ + — = < >

$ % & @ ( )

£

#

Table 2 (Option mode)

Times

Buttons

1 2 3 4

1

!

?

" ä

2

A

5

ö

6

ü

7

1

B C a b c À

3

D E F d e f Ð

4

G H I g h i Ì

5

J K L j k l 5

6

M N O m n o Ñ

7

P

8

Q R S p q r s

9

Š

10 11 12 13 14 15

Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç 2

È É Ê Ë 3

Í Î Ï 4

Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö Ø Œ 6

ß 7

8

T U V t u v Ù Ú Û Ü 8

9

ý Z 9

0

W X Y Z w x y z

(space)

.

, ' : ; 0

/ + — = < >

#

$ % & @ ( ) £ #

326 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

Table 2 (Option mode for CE model)

Times

Buttons

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

!

?

" ä ö ü 1

2

A B C a b c

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Á Â Ã Ä Ç C 2

3

D E F d e f D

Ð

É E

A

C

Ë e 3

4

G H I g h i Í Î 4

5

J K L j k l L ’ L 5

6

M N O m n o N N Ó Ô Õ Ö 6

7

P Q R S p q r s R R Š S S ß 7

8

Ü 8

9

0

T

W

U

X

V

Y t

Z u v T T u

’ w x y z

Ú U

Z Z Z

(space)

.

, ' : ; 0

ý 9

#

/ + — = < >

$ % & @ ( )

£

#

Table 2 (Option mode for GR model)

Times

Buttons

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

!

?

" 1

2

B

Γ

2

3

A

E Z 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

H

K

N

Π

T

X

Θ

Λ

Ξ

I

M

O

Ψ Ω

4

5

6

P

Σ

7

Y

Φ

8

9

0

(space) .

, ' : ; 0

#

/ + — = < >

$ % & @ ( ) £ #

Feature Guide 327

3.3 PT Programming

Table 2 (Option mode for RU model)

Times

Buttons

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

2

10 11

8

9

6

7

3

4

5

0

#

(space)

/ + — = < >

$ % & @ ( ) #

[Example of Entering Characters]

To enter "Ann":

n

A

2

6

(5 times)

OR

FWD/DND n

6

(5 times)

Notes

• To erase the character on the cursor, press CLEAR.

• To move the cursor to the left, press .

• To move the cursor to the right, press .

• If SELECT is pressed, the characters for each button will bring out in reverse order.

• To toggle between Table 1 and Table 2 when using KX-T7600 series, press the leftmost soft button.

328 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.2

Basic Programming

Date & Time [000]

[In 12-hour Format]

[000]

NEXT

ENTER

Hour

01–12

Year

00–99

Month

01–12

Date

01–31

ENTER

Minute

00–59

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

AM/PM

ENTER

END

(HOLD)

[In 24-hour Format]

[000]

ENTER

Year

00–99

Month

01–12

Date

01–31

ENTER

NEXT

Hour

00–23

Minute

00–59

ENTER

END

(HOLD)

System Speed Dialling Number [001]

[001]

ENTER

Speed Dialling No.

000–999

Telephone No.

Max. 32 digits

To the Next Speed Dialling No.

To the Desired Speed Dialling No.

ENTER

END

NEXT

CANCEL

System Speed Dialling Name [002]

[002]

ENTER

Speed Dialling No.

000–999

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

END

Extension Number [003]

[003]

Current Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

New Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 329

3.3 PT Programming

Note

If a PC Phone, PC Console or CTI application software is running on the PC that is connected to the PBX, quit it before this programme.

Extension Name [004]

[004]

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

END

ENTER

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005]

[005]

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

PIN

Max. 10 digits

END

ENTER ENTER

WARNING

When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)

Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.

b)

Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.

c)

Change the PIN frequently.

Operator Assignment [006]

[006]

[007]

ENTER

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Console Paired Telephone [007]

Console No.

01–08

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

END

ENTER deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

ENTER

END

Note

This programme is available after the port connected to the Console is assigned as

"Console" in Terminal Device Assignment [601].

Absent Message [008]

[008]

ENTER

Location No.

1–8

Message

Max. 16 characters

ENTER

END

330 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

Charge Margin [010]

[010]

ENTER

Margin XX.YY%

2+2 decimal places

Charge Tax [011]

[011]

ENTER

Location No.

01–03

ENTER

Tax XX.YY%

2+2 decimal places

END

ENTER

Charge Rate per Unit [012]

[012]

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

Charge Rate

Max. 8 digits including decimal point

ENTER

END

END

Feature Guide 331

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.3

System Programming

Flexible Numbering [100]

[100]

ENTER

Location No.

01–36

Feature No.

1–4 digits

To the Desired Location No.

To the Next Location No.

ENTER

NEXT

CANCEL

END

(HOLD)

Time Service Switching Mode [101]

[101]

ENTER

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

Manual/Automatic ENTER

Time Service Starting Time [102]

[In 12-hour Format]

[102]

ENTER

Day No.

0 Sun/1 Mon/

2 Tue/3 Wed/

4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat

Hour:Minute

01:00–12:59

SELECT

AM/PM

Time No.

1 Day-1/2 Lunch/

3 Day-2/4 Night

ENTER

To the Next Time No.

To the Next Day No.

END

END

NEXT

Page up

[In 24-hour Format]

[102]

ENTER

Day No.

Time No.

0 Sun/1 Mon/

2 Tue/3 Wed/

4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat

1 Day-1/2 Lunch/

3 Day-2/4 Night

Hour:Minute

00:00–23:59

ENTER

To the Next Time No.

To the Next Day No.

END

NEXT

Page up

332 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103]

[103]

Location No.

01–64

ENTER

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

END

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming [110]

[110]

ENTER

Password

4–10 digits

1234

ENTER

END

System Password for User—for PT Programming [111]

[111]

ENTER

Password

4–10 digits

1234

ENTER

END

Manager Password [112]

[112]

ENTER

Password

4–10 digits

1234

Verified Code [120]

[120]

ENTER

Location No.

0001–1000

ENTER

END

Verified Code

1–4 digits

ENTER

END

Verified Code Name [121]

[121]

ENTER

Location No.

0001–1000

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

END

Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122]

[122]

Location No.

0001–1000

PIN

Max. 10 digits

END

ENTER ENTER

WARNING

When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls

Feature Guide 333

3.3 PT Programming using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)

Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.

b)

Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.

c)

Change the PIN frequently.

Verified Code COS Number [123]

[123]

Location No.

0001–1000

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

Decimal Point Position for Currency [130]

[130]

Desired No.

0–7

ENTER ENTER

END

ENTER

END

Currency [131]

[131]

ENTER

Currency

3 characters

END

ENTER

Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190]

[190]

MPR Version

Reference only

END

ENTER

334 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.4

Time Programming

Hold Recall Time [200]

[200]

Time

0–240 s

ENTER ENTER

END

(HOLD)

Transfer Recall Time [201]

[201]

Time

1–240 s

ENTER ENTER

END

Intercept Time [203]

[203]

ENTER

1 Day/2 Lunch

3 Break/4 Night

Hot Line Waiting Time [204]

[204]

Time

0–15 s

ENTER ENTER

Time

1–240 s

END

ENTER

Automatic Redial Repeat Times [205]

[205]

Number of Times

0–15

ENTER

Automatic Redial Interval [206]

ENTER

END

END

[206]

ENTER

Time

(1–120) ×10 s

ENTER

Door Open Duration Time [207]

[207]

Time

2–7 s

ENTER ENTER

END

END

Feature Guide 335

3.3 PT Programming

Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT [208]

[208]

Time

0–60 s

END

ENTER ENTER

DISA Delayed Answer Time [209]

[209]

Time

0–30 s

ENTER ENTER

END

DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210]

[210]

Time

0–7 min

END

ENTER ENTER

DISA Intercept Time [211]

[211]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch

3 Break/4 Night

Time

0–60 s

ENTER

END

336 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.5

TRS/Barring/ARS Programming

TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling [300]

[300]

ENTER

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

Disable/Enable

ENTER

END

(HOLD)

TRS/Barring Denied Code [301]

[301]

ENTER

Level No.

2–6

Location No.

001–100

Denied Code

Max. 16 digits

To the Next Location No.

To the Desired Location No.

ENTER

END

NEXT

CANCEL

TRS/Barring Exception Code [302]

[302]

ENTER

Level No.

2–6

Location No.

001–100

Exception Code

Max. 16 digits

ENTER

END

Special Carrier Access Code [303]

[303]

Location No.

01–20

ENTER

Carrier Access Code

Max. 16 digits

Emergency Number [304]

[304]

Location No.

01–10

ENTER

Emergency No.

Max. 32 digits

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

ARS Mode [320]

[320]

ENTER

SELECT

Off/Idle Line/

All Access ENTER

END

Feature Guide 337

3.3 PT Programming

ARS Leading Number [321]

[321]

Location No.

0001–1000

ENTER

Leading No.

Max. 16 digits

ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322]

[322]

Location No.

0001–1000

ENTER

Plan Table No.

01–16

ARS Exception Number [325]

[325]

Location No.

001–200

ENTER

Exception No.

Max. 16 digits

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330]

[In 12-hour Format]

[330]

ENTER

Plan Table No.

01–16

Day No.

0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/

3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat

ARS Time No.

1 TimeA/2 TimeB/

3 TimeC/4 TimeD

Hour:Minute

01–12/00–59

SELECT

AM/PM

ENTER

END

END

END

END

[In 24-hour Format]

[330]

ENTER

Hour:Minute

00–23/00–59

Plan Table No.

01–16

Day No.

0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/

3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat

ARS Time No.

1 TimeA/2 TimeB/

3 TimeC/4 TimeD

END

ENTER

338 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346]

[331–346]

ENTER

Day No.

0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/

3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat

ARS Time No.

1 TimeA/2 TimeB/

3 TimeC/4 TimeD

Carrier Table No.

1–10/None

ENTER

END

ARS Carrier Name [350]

[350]

Carrier Table No.

01–10

ENTER

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

Priority

1–6

END

ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351]

[351]

ENTER

Carrier Table No.

Trunk Group No.

01–10 01–64

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

END

ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352]

[352]

ENTER

Carrier Table No.

01–10

Digits to Remove

0–15

ENTER

END

ARS Carrier Access Code [353]

[353]

ENTER

Carrier Table No.

01–10

Carrier Access Code

Max. 32 digits

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 339

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.6

Trunk Programming

LCOT/BRI Trunk Connection [400]

[400]

ENTER deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

No Connect/

Connect

ENTER

To the Desired Port No.

To the Next Port No.

END

(HOLD)

NEXT

CANCEL

LCOT/BRI Trunk Name [401]

[401]

Trunk No.

3 digits

ENTER

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

END

LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402]

[402]

Trunk No.

3 digits

ENTER

Trunk Group No.

01–64

LCOT/BRI Trunk Number Reference [409]

[409]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

Trunk No.

Reference only

ENTER

END

END

LCOT Dialling Mode [410]

[410]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

DTMF/Pulse

ENTER

END

LCOT Pulse Rate [411]

[411]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

Low/High

ENTER

END

340 Feature Guide

deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

3.3 PT Programming

LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412]

[412]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

80/160 ms

ENTER

LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing [413]

[413]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

Mode No.

0: None/1: 6.5/

2–113: (N–1)×8 ms

ENTER

END

END

LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming [414]

[414]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

Mode No.

0: None/1: 6.5/

2–113: (N–1)×8 ms

ENTER

END

LCOT Reverse Circuit [415]

[415]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

Disable/

Outgoing/Both Call

ENTER

END

LCOT Pause Time [416]

[416]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

1.5/2.5/

3.5/4.5 s

LCOT Flash/Recall Time [417]

[417]

Slot No.

01–10

ENTER

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

None/80/96/112/

300/600/900/

1200 ms/option

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

LCOT Disconnect Time [418]

[418]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

0.5/1.5/2.0/

4.0/12.0 s

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 341

3.3 PT Programming

deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

BRI Network Type [420]

[420]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

Network Type

00–56

BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421]

[421]

Slot No.

01–10

ENTER

Port No.

01–08

SELECT

DIL/DDI/MSN

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

BRI Subscriber Number [422]

[422]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

Subscriber No.

Max. 16 digits

ENTER

END

BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424]

[424]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

SELECT

Permanent/

Call by call

ENTER

Note

This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.

BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425]

[425]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

SELECT

Permanent/

Call by call

ENTER

Note

This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.

BRI Configuration [426]

[426]

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

SELECT

P-P/P-MP

ENTER ENTER

Note

This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.

END

END

END

342 Feature Guide

deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

BRI TEI Mode [427]

[427]

3.3 PT Programming

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

TEI

00–63 (for Fix)/

Clear (for Automatic)

ENTER

END

Note

This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.

DIL 1:1 Destination [450]

[450]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–24

Destination No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

END

DID Number [451]

[451]

ENTER

Location No.

0001–1000

DID No.

Max. 32 digits

ENTER

END

DID Name [452]

[452]

ENTER

Location No.

0001–1000

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

END

DID Destination [453]

[453]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Location No.

0001–1000

Destination No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

END

Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470]

[470]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Trunk Group No.

01–64

Destination No.

Max. 32 digits

END

ENTER

Feature Guide 343

3.3 PT Programming

Host PBX Access Code [471]

[471]

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

Host PBX Access Code

Max.10 digits

ENTER

Location No.

01–10

END

Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration [472]

[472]

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

Time

01–60 min

ENTER

Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473]

[473]

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

Time

01–60 min

ENTER

END

END

DISA Silence Detection [475]

[475]

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

SELECT

No Detect/

Detect

DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476]

[476]

ENTER

Trunk Group No.

01–64

SELECT

No Detect/

Detect

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477]

[477]

Trunk Group No.

01–64

ENTER

SELECT

No Detect/

Detect

ENTER

END

Caller ID Signal Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

[490]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

SELECT

FSK/FSK with

Visual Caller ID/DTMF

ENTER

344 Feature Guide deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

END

3.3 PT Programming

Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

[491]

Slot No.

01–10

SELECT

12/16 kHz

END

ENTER ENTER

Feature Guide 345

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.7

COS Programming

Trunk Group Number [500]

[500]

ENTER

Trunk Group No.

01–64

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

Disable/Enable

To the Next

COS No.

To the Next

Trunk Group

No.

NEXT

Page up

ENTER

END

(HOLD)

TRS/Barring Level [501]

[501]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

COS No.

01–64

Level

1–7

ENTER

Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502]

[502]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

Call Transfer to Trunk [503]

[503]

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

Call Forwarding to Trunk [504]

[504]

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

END

END

346 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

Executive Busy Override [505]

[505]

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

TRS/Barring Level for Extension Lock [510]

[510]

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

TRS/Barring Level

1–7

END

Executive Busy Override Deny [506]

[506]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

DND Override [507]

[507]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

Account Code Mode [508]

[508]

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

SELECT

Option/

Forced

ENTER

END

TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509]

[509]

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

TRS/Barring Level

1–7

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

Manager Assignment [511]

[511]

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/Enable

ENTER ENTER

END

Feature Guide 347

3.3 PT Programming

Permission for Door Open Access [512]

[512]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

Programming Mode Limitation [516]

[516]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/Personal/

System&Personal

ENTER

END

Time Service Manual Switching [514]

[514]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

END

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone [515]

[515]

ENTER

COS No.

01–64

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

END

END

348 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.8

Extension Programming

EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600]

deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

[600]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–10

Port No.

01–08

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

Off/On

ENTER

To the Next Port No.

To the Desired Port No.

NEXT

CANCEL

Terminal Device Assignment [601]

[601]

Slot No.

01–10

ENTER

Port No.

01–16

SELECT

Telephone/Console 1–8/

Voice Mail 1–(1–12)/

Voice Mail 2–(1–12)/

PC Console 1–8

ENTER

END

(HOLD)

END

Class of Service [602]

[602]

ENTER

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

COS No.

01–64

ENTER

END

User Group [603]

[603]

ENTER

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

User Group No.

001–032

ENTER

END

Extension Intercept Destination [604]

[604]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605]

[605]

Time

0–120 s

ENTER

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

Destination No.

Max. 32 digits

ENTER

END

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 349

3.3 PT Programming

CLIP/COLP Number [606]

[606]

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

CLIP/COLP No.

Max. 16 digits

ENTER

Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]

[620]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Location No.

01–32

END

ENTER

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

END

Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing [621]

[621]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Location No.

01–32

SELECT

Immediate/

1–6 (rings)/

No ring

END

ENTER

Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622]

[622]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

END

Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623]

[623]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624]

[624]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

SELECT

Ring/UCD/

Priority Hunt

ENTER

END

END

350 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625]

[625]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

END

ENTER

Destination No.

Max. 32 digits

Overflow Time [626]

[626]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Destination When All Busy [627]

[627]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

END

ENTER

Overflow Time

(1–125)×10 s

ENTER

END

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Destination No.

Max. 32 digits

Queuing Call Capacity [628]

[628]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Queuing Hurry-up Level [629]

[629]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Number in Queuing

0–30

Hurry-up Level

None/1–30

ENTER

END

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 351

3.3 PT Programming

Queuing Time Table [630]

[630]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

END

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Table No.

None/01–64

Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631]

[631]

Table No.

01–64

ENTER

Location No.

01–16

SELECT

None/Overflow/

Disconnect/"N" × 5 s/

Sequence "N"/OGM "N"

* Number must be entered in the "N".

END

ENTER

Maximum Number of Agents [632]

[632]

ENTER

Incoming Call

Distribution

Group No.

01–64

Number of Agents

No Limitation/1–32

ENTER

END

User Groups of a Paging Group [640]

[640]

Paging Group No.

01–32

ENTER

User Group No.

001–032

SELECT

No/Yes

END

ENTER

External Pagers of a Paging Group [641]

[641]

Paging Group No.

01–32

External Pager No.

1–2

ENTER

SELECT

No/Yes

END

ENTER deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

352 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

User Groups of a Pickup Group [650]

[650]

Pickup Group No.

01–64

ENTER deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

ENTER

END

User Group No.

001–032

VM Group Floating Extension Number [660]

[660]

VM (DPT) Group No.

1–2

ENTER

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

SELECT

No/Yes

ENTER

END

Idle Extension Hunting Type [680]

[680]

ENTER

Hunting Group No.

01–64

SELECT

Circular/

Terminate

Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681]

[681]

ENTER

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

Hunting Group No.

01–64

END

ENTER

Location No.

01–16

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 353

3.3 PT Programming

PS Registration [690]

[690]

ENTER

PS No.

001–128

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

KX-TD7690

To the PS operation below

END deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

Push power button for 2 seconds.

Push F3 key for 2 seconds.

C.Tone

Note

Please refer to Installation Manual for the PS registration in detail.

With the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:

For registering the DECT PS 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

For registering the 2.4 GHz PS 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

With the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30:

For registering the DECT PS 6.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

For registering the 2.4 GHz PS 6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

PS Termination [691]

[691]

ENTER

PS No.

001–128

ENTER

END deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692]

[692]

ENTER

PIN for PS Registration

1–4 digits

1234

ENTER

END

CS Status Reference [699]

[699]

Slot No.

01–11

ENTER

Port No.

01–08

CS Status

Reference only

END

354 Feature Guide

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.9

Resource/Interface Programming

External Pager Floating Extension Number [700]

[700]

deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

ENTER

Pager No.

1–2

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

To the Desired Pager No.

To the Next Pager No.

NEXT

CANCEL

ENTER

END

(HOLD)

Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/

BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) [710]

[710]

ENTER

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/

MESSAGE)

External/Internal1/

Internal2

ENTER

END

Music on Hold [711]

[711]

ENTER

Music Source No.

Beep/BGM1–2

ENTER

END

Music for Transfer [712]

[712]

ENTER

SELECT

Hold Music/

Ring back

ENTER

END

Feature Guide 355

3.3 PT Programming

Doorphone Call Destination [720]

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[720]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Destination No.

Max. 32 digits

[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–11

END

[720]

ENTER

Time No.

1 Day/2 Lunch/

3 Break/4 Night

Card No. and Port No.

1–3 1–4

Slot No.

08–09

Port No.

1–4

Destination No.

Max. 32 digits

END

ENTER

Doorphone Number Reference [729]

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[729]

ENTER

[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]

Slot No.

01–11

Card No. and Port No.

1–3 1–4

Doorphone No.

Reference only

[729]

Port No.

1–4

ENTER

Slot No.

08–09

Doorphone No.

Reference only

END

END

Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]

[730]

ENTER

Message No.

01–64

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER

END deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

356 Feature Guide

deleted:

[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]

[KX-TDA30] and its graphic

Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731]

[731]

ENTER

Message No.

01–64

Name

Max. 20 characters

ENTER

DISA Security Mode [732]

[732]

ENTER

SELECT

None/

Trunk/All

ENTER

END

3.3 PT Programming

END

Feature Guide 357

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.10 SMDR & Maintenance Programming

RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800]

[800]

ENTER

Location

1

SELECT

(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)

CR+LF/CR

ENTER

RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate [800]

[800]

Location

2

ENTER

SELECT

2400/4800/9600/

19200/38400/57600/

115200 bps

ENTER

RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800]

[800]

Location

3

SELECT

7/8 bits

ENTER ENTER

RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit [800]

[800]

Location

4

ENTER

SELECT

None/Mark/

Space/Even/Odd

ENTER

RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800]

[800]

SELECT

1 bit/2 bits

ENTER

Location

5

ENTER

External Modem Control [801]

[801]

Command No.

1–5

ENTER

SMDR Page Length [802]

[802]

Page length

4–99 lines

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

END

END

END

(HOLD)

END

END

END

END

358 Feature Guide

SMDR Skip Perforation [803]

[803]

Skip Perforation

0–95 lines

ENTER

SMDR Outgoing Call Printing [804]

[804]

ENTER

SELECT

No print/Print

ENTER

ENTER

END

SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805]

[805]

ENTER

SELECT

No print/Print

ENTER

Remote Programming [810]

[810]

ENTER

SELECT

Disable/

Enable

ENTER

END

END

Modem Floating Extension Number [811]

[811]

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

ENTER ENTER

END

ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number [812]

[812]

Extn. No.

1–4 digits

END

ENTER ENTER

END

3.3 PT Programming

Feature Guide 359

3.3 PT Programming

3.3.11 Card Programming

Slot Card Type Reference [900]

[900]

Slot No.

01–11

ENTER

Card Name

Reference only

END

(HOLD)

Slot Card Deletion [901]

[901]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–11

Delete

Confirming the deleting operation.

To the Next Slot No.

To the Desired Slot No.

ENTER

END

NEXT

CANCEL

Slot Card Reset [902]

[902]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–11

Reset

Confirming the resetting operation.

ENTER

END

OPB3 Option Card Type Reference [910] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

[910]

ENTER

Slot No.

01–11

Card No.

1–3

Option Card Type

Reference only

END

OPB3 Option Card Deletion [911] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

[911]

Slot No.

01–11

END

ENTER

Card No.

1–3

Delete

Confirming the deleting operation.

ENTER

360 Feature Guide

Section 4

Appendix

Feature Guide 361

4.1 Capacity of System Resources

deleted: column for KX-TDA100

4.1

Capacity of System Resources

4.1.1

Capacity of System Resources

Category

System

Item KX-TDA15 KX-TDA30

Tenant

COS

Trunk Group

User Group

Paging Group

Call Pickup Group

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

PS Ring Group

VM (DPT) Group

VM (DTMF) Group

Queuing Time Table

Idle Extension Hunting

Group

Broadcasting Group

Absent Message—

System

Absent Message—

Extension

Message Waiting—PT

+ SLT

Message Waiting—PS

+ Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Number of Characters of Name

Extension Number

Digits

Extension Personal

Identification Number

(PIN)

Call Park Zone

Conference

8

64

64

32

32

64

64 (32 extensions/ group)

32

1 VPS 8 ch

2 groups 24 ch

64

64 (16 extensions/ group)

8 16 characters

1 16 characters/ extn.

256

256

20

1 – 4

10 digits/extn.

100

3 10 – 8 4

8

64

64

32

32

64

64 (32 extensions/ group)

32

1 VPS 8 ch

2 groups 24 ch

64

64 (16 extensions/ group)

8

8 16 characters extn.

256

256

20

1 – 4

10 digits/extn.

100

3 10 – 8 4

KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200

8

64

64

32

32

64

64 (32 extensions/ group)

32

2 VPSs 24 ch

2 groups 32 ch

64

64 (16 extensions/ group)

8

8 16 characters extn.

512

256

20

1 – 4

10 digits/extn.

100

3 10 – 8 4

362 Feature Guide

deleted: column for KX-TDA100

4.1 Capacity of System Resources

Category

System

Item

Verified Code

Verified Code

Personal Identification

Number (PIN)

KX-TDA15 KX-TDA30 KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200

4 digits, 1 000 entries 4 digits, 1 000 entries 4 digits, 1 000 entries

10 digits, 1 000 entries

10 digits, 1 000 entries

10 digits, 1 000 entries

Special Carrier Code 16 digits, 20 entries 16 digits, 20 entries 16 digits, 20 entries

Host PBX Access

Code

10 digits,

10 entries/trunk group

10 digits,

10 entries/trunk group

10 digits,

10 entries/trunk group

Dialling

ARS

DDI/DID Table 32 digits, 1 000 entries

200 calls

32 digits, 1 000 entries

200 calls

32 digits, 1 000 entries

200 calls SMDR

Emergency Call

Quick Dialling

System Speed Dialling

Personal Speed

Dialling

32 digits, 10 entries 32 digits, 10 entries 32 digits, 10 entries

4 digits, 80 entries 4 digits, 80 entries 4 digits, 80 entries

32 digits, 1 000 entries

32 digits,

10 entries/extn.

32 digits, 1 000 entries

32 digits,

10 entries/extn.

32 digits, 1 000 entries

32 digits,

10 entries/extn.

One-touch Dialling

Hot Line

Key Pad Protocol Dial

(ISDN Service

Access)

Redial

Routing Plan Table

Leading Number Table

32 digits

32 digits

32 digits

32 digits

16 entries

16 digits, 1 000 entries

32 digits

32 digits

32 digits

32 digits

16 entries

16 digits, 1 000 entries

32 digits

32 digits

32 digits

32 digits

16 entries

16 digits, 1 000 entries

Leading Number

Exception Table

ARS Carrier

Itemised Billing Code

Authorisation Code

Networking

TIE Line Routing and

Modification Table

Leading Number

PBX Code

16 digits, 200 entries 16 digits, 200 entries 16 digits, 200 entries

10

10 digits

10 digits

32 entries

3 digits

7 digits

10

10 digits

10 digits

32 entries

3 digits

7 digits

10

10 digits

10 digits

32 entries

3 digits

7 digits

Feature Guide 363

deleted: column for KX-TDA100

4.1 Capacity of System Resources

Category Item KX-TDA15

TRS/Barring TRS/Barring Level

TRS/Barring Denied

Code

Call Log

TRS/Barring

Exception Code

Outgoing Call Log—

PT

Outgoing Call Log—

PS

Incoming Call Log—

PT

Incoming Call Log—

PS

Password

Incoming Call Log—

Incoming Call

Distribution Group

System Password for

Installer

System Password for

Administrator—for PC

Programming

System Password for

User—for PC

Programming

System Password for

Administrator—for PT

Programming

System Password for

User—for PT

Programming

Manager Password

Programmer

Code

Installer Level

Programmer Code

Administrator Level

Programmer Code

User Level

Programmer Code

7

16 digits,

100 entries/level

16 digits,

100 entries/level

100 logs/extn.

5 52 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

5 28 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

10 52 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

10 28 logs/PBX

100 logs/group

10 64 logs/PBX

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 digits

4 – 16 characters

4 – 16 characters

0 – 16 characters

KX-TDA30

7

16 digits,

100 entries/level

16 digits,

100 entries/level

100 logs/extn.

5 52 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

5 28 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

10 52 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

10 28 logs/PBX

100 logs/group

10 64 logs/PBX

KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200

7

16 digits,

100 entries/level

16 digits,

100 entries/level

100 logs/extn.

5 304 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

5 128 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

10 304 logs/PBX

100 logs/extn.

10 128 logs/PBX

100 logs/group

10 64 logs/PBX

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 digits

4 – 16 characters

4 – 16 characters

0 – 16 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 digits

4 – 16 characters

4 – 16 characters

0 – 16 characters

364 Feature Guide

4.2

Tones/Ring Tones

4.2.1

Tones/Ring Tones

Tone Patterns (Default)

1 s

Confirmation Tone 1

Confirmation Tone 2

Confirmation Tone 3

Confirmation Tone 4

Confirmation Tone 5

Dial Tone 1

Dial Tone 2

Dial Tone 3

Dial Tone 4

Busy Tone

Reorder Tone

Ringback Tone 1

Ringback Tone 2

DND Tone

Trunk Call Limit Warning

Tone

4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide 365

4.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Tone Patterns (Default)

Hold Alarm Tone

Call Waiting Tone 1

1 s

Call Waiting Tone 2

Ring Tone Patterns (Default)

1 s

Single

Double

Triple

S-Double

15 s

OR

366 Feature Guide

4.3 List of Abbreviations

4.3

List of Abbreviations

4.3.1

List of Abbreviations

A

AA Automated Attendant

ANI Automatic Number Identification

AOC Advice of Charge

APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone

ARS Automatic Route Selection

E

EFA External Feature Access

F

FWD Call Forwarding

G

B

BGM Background Music

BRI Basic Rate Interface

C

CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber

CF Call Forwarding—by ISDN

CLI Calling Line Identification

CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation

CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction

CNIP Calling Name Identification Presentation

I

ICD Incoming Call Distribution

IRNA Intercept Routing—No Answer

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

L

LCS Live Call Screening

LED Light Emitting Diode

CNIR Calling Name Identification Restriction

COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation

COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction

CONP Connected Name Identification Presentation

M

MCID Malicious Call Identification

MSN Multiple Subscriber Number

CONR Connected Name Identification Restriction

COS Class of Service

CPC Calling Party Control

O

OHCA Off-hook Call Announcement

OPX Off Premise Extension

CT Call Transfer—by ISDN

CTI Computer Telephony Integration

P

D

DDI Direct Dialling In

DID Direct Inward Dialling

DIL Direct In Line

DISA Direct Inward System Access

DND Do Not Disturb

DPT Digital Proprietary Telephone

DSS Direct Station Selection

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

PIN Personal Identification Number

PRI Primary Rate Interface

PT Proprietary Telephone

S

SLT Single Line Telephone

SMDR Station Message Detail Recording

Feature Guide 367

4.3 List of Abbreviations

T

TAFAS Trunk Answer from Any Station

TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier

TRS/Barring Toll Restriction/Call Barring

U

UCD Uniform Call Distribution

V

VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol

VPN Virtual Private Network

VPS Voice Processing System

X

XDP eXtra Device Port

368 Feature Guide

4.4

Revision History

4.4.1

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Version 1.1

New Contents

• 1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

CLIP Number Notification

• 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button

• 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button

• 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

Digital XDP

• 1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

• 1.20.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

DID Number Notification to the VPS

Changed Contents

• 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]

• 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

[Directed Call Pickup]

• 1.14.1 Paging

Paging Group

• 1.19.1 Fixed Buttons

FLASH/RECALL

• 1.19.3 LED Indication

Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp

Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button

• 1.24.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Handover

4.4 Revision History

Feature Guide 369

4.4 Revision History

• 1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

CD (Condition Code)

• 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

• 2.2.4 Time Service

Features Using Time Service

• 3.3.1 Programming Instructions

Entering Characters

• 3.3.4 Time Programming

Intercept Time [203]

DISA Intercept Time [211]

• 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources

370 Feature Guide

4.4 Revision History

4.4.2

KX-TDA30 Version 1.1

New Contents

• 1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

• 1.20.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

DID Number Notification to the VPS

Changed Contents

• 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

[Directed Call Pickup]

• 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

Digital XDP

• 1.14.1 Paging

Paging Group

• 1.19.3 LED Indication

Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp

Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button

• 1.24.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Handover

• 1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

CD (Condition Code)

• 2.2.4 Time Service

Features Using Time Service

• 3.3.1 Programming Instructions

Entering Characters

• 3.3.4 Time Programming

Intercept Time [203]

DISA Intercept Time [211]

• 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources

Feature Guide 371

4.4 Revision History

372 Feature Guide

Index

Feature Guide 373

Index

A

Absent Message 170

Absent Message [008] 330

Account Code Entry 75

Account Code Mode [508] 347

Administrative Information Output Features 230

Advice of Charge (AOC) 188

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 72

Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override 69

Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 72

ANI —> Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 160

Answering Features 66

Answering Features—SUMMARY 66

AOC —> Advice of Charge (AOC) 188

Appendix 361

ARS Carrier Access Code [353] 339

ARS Carrier Name [350] 339

ARS Exception Number [325] 338

ARS Leading Number [321] 338

ARS Mode [320] 337

ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352] 339

ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346] 339

ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322] 338

ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330] 338

ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351] 339

ARS —> Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 113

Audible Tone Features 245

Authorisation Code 117

Automatic Call Hold 132

Automatic Call Park 134

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 94

Automatic Extension Release 71

Automatic Log-out 55

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 160

Automatic Privacy 140

Automatic Redial 90

Automatic Redial Interval [206] 335

Automatic Redial Repeat Times [205] 335

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 113

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 113

Automatic Setup 303

Automatic Station Release —> Automatic Extension Release 71

B

Background Music (BGM) 150

Basic Programming 329

BGM —> Background Music (BGM) 150

BGM—External 150

Boss & Secretary feature 63

BRI Configuration [426] 342

BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421] 342

BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424] 342

BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425] 342

BRI Network Type [420] 342

BRI Subscriber Number [422] 342

BRI TEI Mode [427] 343

Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 143

Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

143

Broadcasting Group 143

Budget Management 107

Built-in Small Call Centre Features 4

Busy Line/Busy Party Features 94

Busy on Busy 53

Busy Station Signalling (BSS) —> Call Waiting 38

Buttons and Functions 324

C

Call Directory—Extension Dialling 72

Call Directory—Speed Dialling 91

Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT [208] 336

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 189

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 191

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG 272

Call Forwarding (FWD) 61

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 58

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 58

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 58

Call Forwarding to Trunk [504] 346

Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605] 349

Call Handling Features 15

Call Hold 132

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN 193

Call Hold Retrieve Deny 132

Call Monitor 96

Call Park 134

Call Park Recall 134

Call Park Retrieve Deny 134

Call Pickup 68

Call Splitting 135

Call Transfer 130

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 194

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG 274

Call Transfer to Trunk [503] 346

Call Transfer with Announcement 130

Call Transfer without Announcement 130

Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement 130

Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement

130

Call Waiting 38

Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) 38

Call Waiting Tone 99

Caller ID 160

Caller ID Features 160

Caller ID Signal Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 344

Caller ID to SLT Port 160

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 27

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 160

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 129

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

186

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and

Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/

CONP)—by QSIG 270

Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR) 187

Capacity of System Resources 362

Card Programming 360

374 Feature Guide

Index

CCBS —> Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 197

CCBS —> Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by

QSIG 276

CF —> Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 189

CF —> Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 191

CF —> Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG 272

Charge Margin [010] 331

Charge Meter 236

Charge Rate per Unit [012] 331

Charge Tax [011] 331

Circular Hunting 40

Class of Service (COS) 283

Class of Service [602] 349

CLI —> Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 27

CLIP —> Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 160

CLIP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation

(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270

CLIP/COLP Number [606] 350

CLIR —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/

COLR) 187, 271

CNIP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation

(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270

CNIR —> Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/

CONR) 271

COLP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP) 186

COLP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation

(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270

COLR —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/

COLR) 187, 271

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 197

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG 276

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 278

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features 4, 278

Conference 138

Conference Call 143

Conference Features 137

Conference Features—SUMMARY 137

Confirmation Tone 246

CONP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation

(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270

CONR —> Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/

CONR) 271

Console Paired Telephone [007] 330

Consultation Hold 95, 96, 124, 135, 227

Conversation Features 118

COS Programming 346

COS —> Class of Service (COS) 283

CPC —> Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 129

CS Status Reference [699] 354

CT —> Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 194

CT —> Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG 274

CTI —> Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 278

Currency [131] 334

D

Data Line Security 122

Date & Time [000] 329

DDI —> Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 21

Decimal Point Position for Currency [130] 334

Delayed Ringing 46

Denied Code Tables 102

Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625] 351

Destination When All Busy [627] 351

Dial Tone 245

Dial Tone Transfer 109

Dial Type Selection 76

Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 125

DID Destination [453] 343

DID Name [452] 343

DID Number [451] 343

DID —> Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 21

Digital XDP 126

DIL 1:1 Destination [450] 343

DIL —> Direct In Line (DIL) 19

Direct In Line (DIL) 19

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 21

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 153

Direct One-touch Answering 66

Direct Trunk Access 84

Directed Call Pickup 68

DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service) 153

DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476] 344

DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477] 344

DISA Delayed Answer Time [209] 336

DISA Intercept Routing—Busy/DND 154

DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer 155

DISA Intercept Time [211] 336

DISA Intercept—No Dial 153

DISA Security Mode [732] 357

DISA Security Mode and Available Features 153

DISA Silence Detection [475] 344

DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210] 336

DISA —> Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 153

Display Information 180

DND Override 65

DND Override [507] 347

DND —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 58

Do Not Disturb (DND) 65

Door Open 148

Door Open Duration Time [207] 335

Doorphone Call 146

Doorphone Call Destination [720] 356

Doorphone Number Reference [729] 356

E

E1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 201

E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 201

EFA —> External Feature Access (EFA) 124

Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Lock 108

Emergency Call 74

Emergency Number [304] 337

Entering Characters 326

Entering System Programming Mode 325

Feature Guide 375

Index

Exception Code Tables 102

Exclusive Call Hold 132

Executive Busy Override 95

Executive Busy Override [505] 347

Executive Busy Override Deny 95

Executive Busy Override Deny [506] 347

Extension Controlling Features 239

Extension Feature Clear 241

Extension Intercept Destination [604] 349

Extension Lock 108

Extension Name [004] 330

Extension Number [003] 329

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) 239

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005] 330

Extension PIN Lock 239

Extension Port Configuration 282

Extension Programming 349

Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration 125

Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration [472] 344

External Feature Access (EFA) 124

External Modem Control [801] 358

External Pager Floating Extension Number [700] 355

External Pagers of a Paging Group [641] 352

EXtra Device Port (XDP) 282

EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600] 349

F

Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 312

Feature Guide References 2

Feature Highlights 4

Fixed Buttons 171

Flash/Recall/Terminate 123

Flexible Buttons 174

Flexible Numbering [100] 332

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering 305

Floating Extension 310

Floating Station —> Floating Extension 310

Full One-touch Dialling 88

FWD —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 58

FWD—All Calls 61

FWD—Busy 61

FWD—Busy/No Answer 61

FWD—Follow Me 61

FWD—No Answer 61

G

Group 284

Group Call Distribution 46

Group Call Pickup 68

H

Handover 220

Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation 121

Hands-free Answerback 69

Hands-free Operation 118

Headset Operation 121

Hold Recall 132

Hold Recall Time [200] 335

Holding Features 132

376 Feature Guide

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 79

Host PBX Access Code [471] 344

Hot Line 93

Hot Line Waiting Time [204] 335

Hurry-up Transfer —> Manual Queue Redirection 50

I

Idle Extension Hunting 40

Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681] 353

Idle Extension Hunting Type [680] 353

Idle Line Access (Local Access) 84

Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103] 333

Idle Line Preference 83

Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing [621] 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624] 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 42

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY 42

Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622]

350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620] 350

Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623] 350

Incoming Call Features 16

Incoming Call Indication Features 36

Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY 36

Incoming Call Log 165

Incoming Call Log Display Lock 166

Incoming Call Queue Monitor 56

Incoming Trunk Call Features 16

Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 16

Installation Manual References 2

Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console 319

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 182

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features 182

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 182

Intercept Routing 29

Intercept Routing—Busy/DND 29

Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 29

Intercept Routing—No Destination 32

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group

52

Intercept Time [203] 335

Intercom Call 72

Internal Call Block 34

Internal Call Features 33

Internal Call Features—SUMMARY 33

Interrupt Redial 90

Introduction 318

IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 29

ISDN Centrex Service 184

ISDN Extension 198

ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number [812] 359

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 200

ISDN —> Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 182

Itemised Billing Code 117

K

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Version 1.1

369

KX-TDA30 Version 1.1

371

Index

L

Last Number Redial 90

LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming [414] 341

LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing [413] 341

LCOT Dialling Mode [410] 340

LCOT Disconnect Time [418] 341

LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412] 341

LCOT Flash/Recall Time [417] 341

LCOT Pause Time [416] 341

LCOT Pulse Rate [411] 340

LCOT Reverse Circuit [415] 341

LCOT/BRI Trunk Connection [400] 340

LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402] 340

LCOT/BRI Trunk Name [401] 340

LCOT/BRI Trunk Number Reference [409] 340

LCS —> Live Call Screening (LCS) 217

LED Indication 177

Line Preference Override 83

Line Preference—Incoming 67

Line Preference—Outgoing 83

List of Abbreviations 367

Live Call Screening (LCS) 217

Local Alarm Information 315

Log-in/Log-out 54

Log-in/Log-out Monitor 55

M

Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190] 334

Making Call Features 70

Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 196

Manager Assignment [511] 347

Manager Features 295

Manager Password [112] 333

Manual Queue Redirection 50

Maximum Number of Agents [632] 352

MCID —> Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 196

Memory Dialling Features 86

Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY 86

Message Features 167

Message Waiting 167

Modem Floating Extension Number [811] 359

MSN —> Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 24

Multiple FWD 63

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 24

Music for Transfer [712] 355

Music on Hold 136

Music on Hold [711] 355

Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/BGM2

(with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) [710] 355

Mute 120

N

Networking Features 4, 247

No Line Preference 67, 83

O

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 100

Off-hook Monitor 119

OGM —> Outgoing Message (OGM) 151

OHCA —> Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 100

One-touch Dialling 88

One-touch Transfer 131

OPB3 Option Card Deletion [911] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

360

OPB3 Option Card Type Reference [910] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 360

Operator Assignment [006] 330

Operator Call 294

Operator Features 294

Optional Device Features 146

Outgoing Call Log 90

Outgoing Message (OGM) 151

Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730] 356

Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731] 357

Overflow Feature 52

Overflow Time [626] 351

P

Paging 141

Paging Deny 141

Paging DND 65, 142

Paging Features 141

Paging Group 141

Parallelled Telephone 126

Parallelled Telephone Features 5

Password Security 318

Pause Insertion 78

Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 345

PC Phone/PC Console Features 5

PC Programming 297, 319

Permission for Door Open Access [512] 348

Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692] 354

Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock 91

Pickup Dialling —> Hot Line 93

PIN —> Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) 239

PIN —> Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) 111

Portable Station (PS) Connection 220

Portable Station (PS) Features 5, 220

Power Failure Connections 312

Power Failure Restart 314

Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

312

Predialling 70

Prime Line Preference 67, 83

Priority Hunting 46

Privacy Release 140

Programming Instructions 317, 324

Programming Mode Limitation [516] 348

Programming Structure 325

Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 171

PS Directory 225

PS Feature Buttons 226

PS Registration [690] 354

PS Ring Group 222

PS Termination [691] 354

PS —> Portable Station (PS) Features 220

PT Programming 300, 324

Feature Guide 377

Index

PT —> Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 171

Pulse to Tone Conversion 76

Q

QSIG Network 268

QSIG Network—SUMMARY 268

Queuing Call Capacity [628] 351

Queuing Feature 49

Queuing Hurry-up Level [629] 351

Queuing Time Table [630] 352

Quick Dialling 92

Quick Setup 302

R

Receiving Group Features 40

Remote Control 56

Remote Extension Control by User 244

Remote Extension Lock 108

Remote Programming [810] 359

Remote Station Control by User —> Remote Extension Control by

User 244

Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Lock 108

Required Telephone/Extension 324

Resource/Interface Programming 355

Reverse Circuit 77

Revision History 369

Ring 46

Ring Tone Pattern Selection 37

Ringing Line Preference 67

RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate [800] 358

RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800] 358

RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit [800] 358

RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800] 358

RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800] 358

S

S-CO Line Access 84

Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 97

Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY 97

Seizing a Line Features 82

Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY 82

Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631] 352

Slot Card Deletion [901] 360

Slot Card Reset [902] 360

Slot Card Type Reference [900] 360

SMDR & Maintenance Programming 358

SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805] 359

SMDR Outgoing Call Printing [804] 359

SMDR Page Length [802] 358

SMDR Skip Perforation [803] 359

SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 230

Software Upgrading 311

Special Carrier Access Code 81

Special Carrier Access Code [303] 337

Speed Dialling—Personal/System 91

Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting 40

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 230

Station Password Lock —> Extension PIN Lock 239

Station Programme Clear —> Extension Feature Clear 241

378 Feature Guide

Station Speed Dialling —> Personal Speed Dialling 91

Subaddressing 198

Subaddressing (SUB) 183

Supervisory Feature 56

System Configuration and Administration Features 281

System Configuration—Hardware 282

System Configuration—Software 283

System Data Control 297

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming [110] 333

System Password for User—for PT Programming [111] 333

System Programming 332

System Requirements 319

System Speed Dialling Name [002] 329

System Speed Dialling Number [001] 329

T

T1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 203

T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 203

TAFAS —> Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 149

Tenant Service 287

Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block 288

Terminal Device Assignment [601] 349

Terminated Hunting 40

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN 195

TIE Line Service 247

Time Programming 335

Time Service 290

Time Service Manual Switching [514] 348

Time Service Starting Time [102] 332

Time Service Switching Mode [101] 332

Timed Reminder 243

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 102

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 102

Tones/Ring Tones 365

Transfer Recall 130

Transfer Recall Time [201] 335

Transferring Features 130

TRS/Barring Denied Code [301] 337

TRS/Barring Exception Code [302] 337

TRS/Barring Level 103

TRS/Barring Level [501] 346

TRS/Barring Level for Extension Lock [510] 347

TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509] 347

TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 102

TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling [300] 337

TRS/Barring —> Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Features 102

TRS/Barring/ARS Programming 337

Trunk Access 84

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 149

Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502] 346

Trunk Call Features 73

Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 73

Trunk Call Limitation 125

Trunk Group Access 84

Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470] 343

Trunk Group Number [500] 346

Trunk Programming 340

Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration 125

Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473] 344

Two-way Recording into the VPS 218

U

UCD —> Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 46

Unattended Conference 138

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 46

User Group [603] 349

User Groups of a Paging Group [640] 352

User Groups of a Pickup Group [650] 353

User Manual References 2

User-to-user Signalling Type 1 (UUS-1) 183

V

Verified Code [120] 333

Verified Code COS Number [123] 334

Verified Code Entry 111

Verified Code Name [121] 333

Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) 111

Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122] 333

VIP Call 51

Virtual Private Network (VPN) 266

VM Group Floating Extension Number [660] 353

VM —> Voice Mail Features 205

Voice Mail (VM) Group 205

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 215

Voice Mail DTMF Integration 208

Voice Mail Features 4, 205

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 277

VoIP —> Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 277

VPN —> Virtual Private Network (VPN) 266

VPS Data Control by the PBX 218

W

Walking COS 110

Walking Extension 242

Walking Station —> Walking Extension 242

Whisper OHCA 101

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 227

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone [515] 348

Wrap-up 54

X

XDP —> EXtra Device Port (XDP) 282

Index

Feature Guide 379

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Copyright:

This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC).

You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC.

2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

PSQX2634VA

KK0203CM5074

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents